JP7381107B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

Conventionally, there has been a gaming machine that enters a specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state after a specific result is derived in the variable display of identification information such as special symbols in the normal gaming state (Patent Document 1 reference).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2011-172741

However, there is still room for improvement in gaming machines that can enter a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in order to increase the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
A game in which a predetermined determination can be executed in a first gaming state and a second gaming state different from the first gaming state, and when a specific result is derived in the predetermined determination, a specific game may be executed. control means;
A gaming machine equipped with a performance control means capable of executing a performance,
After the specific game, the game control means may or may not enter a specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state and the second gaming state,
The probability of being in the specific gaming state when the specific result is derived in the first gaming state is different from the probability of being in the specific gaming state when the specific result is derived in the second gaming state,
The performance control means indicates that the specific result has been derived in both cases where the specific result is derived in the first gaming state and when the specific result is derived in the second gaming state. It is possible to execute a first suggestion performance that indicates, and after the suggestion performance, it is possible to execute a second suggestion performance that suggests whether the derivation of the specific result was performed in the first gaming state or the second gaming state. It is characterized by

According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decline in gaming interest.

1 is a perspective view of a pachinko game machine according to a basic embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view of a game board unit. (A) is a front view illustrating the standby state of the movable plate body, (B) is a front view illustrating the moving state of the movable plate body, and (C) is a front view illustrating the rotating state of the movable plate body. It is a front view of display devices. 1 is a rear view of a pachinko gaming machine according to a basic embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the game control board side. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the production control board side. (A) is a table showing general map related determination information, and (B) is a table showing special pattern related determination information. (A) is a configuration example of a hit determination table, (B) is a configuration example of a normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table, and (C) is a configuration example of an auxiliary game control table. (A) is a configuration example of a jackpot determination table, (B) is a configuration example of a jackpot symbol type determination table, and (C) is a configuration example of a reach determination table. This is a configuration example of a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table. This is a configuration example of a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table. It is an example of a structure of a 1st look-ahead determination table. It is an example of a structure of a 2nd look-ahead determination table. (A) is a configuration example of a jackpot game control table, and (B) is a configuration example of a game state setting table. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a demo video, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a setting screen. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a first normal background image, (B) is a diagram showing an example of a second normal background image, and (C) is a diagram showing an example of a third normal background image. FIG. 3D is a diagram showing an example of a background image for probability variation, and FIG. 3E is a diagram showing an example of a background image for time saving. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot opening performance, (B) is a diagram showing an example of a round performance, and (C) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot ending performance. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a production pattern, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a production pattern display area. It is a diagram showing an example of a special symbol variation effect with no reach. It is a diagram showing an example from the start of the special figure variation performance until reaching the reach. It is a figure showing an example of N reach. It is a figure showing an example of L reach. It is a figure showing an example of L reach, and is a continuation of Drawing 23. It is a figure showing an example of SP reach. 26 is a diagram showing an example of SP reach, and is a continuation of FIG. 25. FIG. FIG. 26 is a diagram illustrating an example of SP reach, and is a continuation of FIG. 26. It is a figure showing an example of a movable object production. It is a figure showing an example of operation performance. It is a diagram showing an example of a hold effect. It is a figure showing an example of a pending icon change notice. It is a figure showing an example of a pending icon change notice. It is a flowchart of game control main processing. It is a flowchart of game control side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of sensor detection processing. 36 is a flowchart of sensor detection processing, and is a diagram continuing from FIG. 35. FIG. It is a flowchart of normal operation processing. It is a flowchart of special operation processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol standby processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol confirmation processing. It is a flowchart of production control main processing. It is a flowchart of 1ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of 10ms timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart of received command analysis processing. 47 is a flowchart of received command analysis processing, and is a diagram continuing from FIG. 46. FIG. It is a front view of the game board according to the first embodiment. It is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the configuration of the game board 1 after the game ball enters the second big prize opening 15. It is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on the game control board side according to the first embodiment. (A) is a configuration example of the jackpot determination table according to the first embodiment, (B) is a configuration example of the jackpot symbol type determination table according to the first embodiment, and (C) is a configuration example of the jackpot symbol type determination table according to the first embodiment. This is a configuration example of a losing symbol type determination table. It is a configuration example of a jackpot game control table according to the first embodiment. (A) is a configuration example of a normal small win game control table, and (B) is a configuration example of a time saving small win game control table. (A) is a time chart showing the flow of the normal small winning game, and (B) is a time chart showing the flow of the time saving small winning game. (A) is a configuration example of a hit determination table, (B) is a configuration example of a normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table, and (C) is a configuration example of an auxiliary game control table. (A) is the type of special symbol (special symbol type) that triggers the occurrence of the jackpot game in the case of a jackpot in the normal gaming state, and the gaming state to which the jackpot game transitions when the jackpot game corresponding to the special symbol type ends; This is an example of the configuration of a gaming state setting table showing the relationship between the game state and the ending conditions related to the gaming state, and (B) is the type of special symbol that triggers the occurrence of the jackpot game when a jackpot is achieved in the time saving state (special symbol type). ), the gaming state to which the jackpot game corresponding to the special symbol type ends, and the ending condition related to the gaming state. It is a diagram showing the main game flow according to the first embodiment. This is a configuration example of a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table in a normal gaming state. It is a configuration example of a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table in a time saving state. It is a diagram showing a specific example of special performance. It is a diagram showing a specific example of special performance. It is a diagram showing a specific example of special performance. It is a diagram showing a specific example of special performance. It is a diagram showing a specific example of a losing time-saving negative effect. The type of special symbol that triggers the occurrence of the jackpot game in the case of a jackpot in the time-saving state (special symbol type), the gaming state that changes with the end of the jackpot game corresponding to the special symbol type, and the gaming state. This is a configuration example of a game state setting table showing the relationship with the end condition. It is a diagram showing the main game flow according to the second embodiment. It is a configuration example of a losing symbol type determination table according to the third embodiment. It is a diagram showing the main game flow according to the third embodiment. It is a diagram showing a specific example of a normal stay suggestion performance. It is a diagram showing a specific example of a normal stay suggestion performance and a losing time short stay suggestion performance. It is a diagram showing a specific example of a presentation suggesting a short stay for a short period of time. It is a diagram showing a specific example of a normal stay suggestion performance and a losing time short stay suggestion performance.

<Basic embodiment>
First, a basic embodiment of the present invention, which is the premise of the characteristic parts of the gaming machine of the present invention, will be specifically described with reference to the drawings. In each referenced figure, the same parts are given the same reference numerals, and overlapping explanations regarding the same parts will be omitted in principle. In addition, in the following, in order to simplify the description, by writing a symbol or code that refers to information, a signal, a physical quantity, a member, etc., the name of the information, signal, physical quantity, member, etc. for the symbol or code will be omitted or abbreviated. Sometimes.

1. Mechanical Configuration of Gaming Machine Pachinko gaming machine PY, which is a basic embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention, will be described. First, the mechanical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PY will be explained using FIGS. 1 to 4. In the following description, the horizontal, vertical, and vertical directions of each part of the pachinko game machine PY refer to the horizontal, vertical, and vertical directions (as viewed from the front) for the player facing the pachinko game machine PY. Furthermore, "front" refers to the direction from the pachinko machine PY approaching the player facing the pachinko machine PY, and "backward" refers to the direction approaching the pachinko machine PY from the player facing the pachinko machine PY. ,explain.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko game machine PY includes a game board unit YU including a game board 1, and a game machine frame 2 housing the game board unit YU inside. The gaming machine frame 2 includes a frame-shaped outer frame 21 that is fixed to the gaming parlor, an inner frame 22 that is attached to the outer frame 21 and to which the game board unit YU is attached, and a front frame that is rotatably supported by the inner frame 22. A door 23 is provided.

The outer circumferential shapes of the outer frame 21, the inner frame 22, and the front door 23 when viewed from the front are approximately the same. An inner frame 22 is attached to the front surface of the outer frame 21.

The front door 23 can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 22. The front door 23 includes a frame-shaped front frame 23m having a large substantially vertically rectangular opening formed in the center thereof, and a transparent plate 23t fitted into the opening. When the front door 23 is closed, the game board 1 included in the game board unit YU and the transparent plate 23t face each other. The transparent plate 23t is a transparent synthetic resin plate formed into a substantially vertically long rectangular shape. Therefore, when the pachinko game machine PY is installed in a game parlor, a player in front of the pachinko game machine PY cannot visually recognize the game area 6 formed on the front side of the game board 1 through the transparent plate 23t. can. Note that a transparent glass plate may be used as the transparent plate 23t instead of the transparent synthetic resin plate. It is sufficient if the gaming area 6 can be viewed through the transparent plate 23t from the front of the pachinko gaming machine PY.

A handle 72k that can be rotated to fire a game ball is provided at the lower right portion of the front surface of the front frame 23m. The handle 72k can be rotated clockwise, and the amount by which the handle 72k is operated (rotation angle) is associated with the amount of force applied to the game ball (shooting strength) to make the game ball launch. There is. Therefore, the game ball is fired with a firing intensity that corresponds to the rotational operation of the handle 72k.

Further, at the lower part of the front surface of the front frame 23m, an upper plate 34 that largely protrudes forward and a lower plate 35 arranged directly below the upper plate 34 are provided. At the center of the front side of the upper plate 34, a first effect button 40k that can be pressed downward is provided. The operating portion of the first performance button 40k that visibly protrudes from the upper surface of the upper plate 34 is shaped into a hemispherical shape. Further, on the rear side of the upper surface of the upper tray 34, a supply ball storage hole 34A is formed for storing game balls supplied to the handle 72k. Further, on the upper surface of the lower tray 35, a surplus ball storage hole 35A is provided for storing surplus game balls that cannot be accommodated in the supply ball storage hole 34A.

Furthermore, an upper decorative body 31, a right decorative body 32, and a left decorative body 33 that protrude forward are provided above, on the right side, and on the left side of the transparent plate 23t on the front surface of the front frame 23m. On the bottom surface of the upper decorative body 31, a pair of two speakers 52 capable of outputting sound, specifically a speaker 52L arranged on the left side and a speaker 52R arranged on the right side, are arranged facing downward and arranged in the left and right direction. They are placed side by side at a distance. Further, a second effect button 41k that can be pressed downward is provided at the lower part of the right side decorative body 32. The operation part of the second performance button 41k is shaped like a rod. Furthermore, a frame lamp 53 capable of emitting light is provided from the right side decorative body 32 to the right front portion of the upper plate 34 and from the left side decorative body 33 to the front left portion of the upper plate 34.

Note that the positions and numbers of members and devices provided in the gaming machine frame 2 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Next, the game board unit YU will be explained using FIG. 2 in addition to FIG. 1. The game board unit YU includes a game board 1 and a board effect unit EU attached to the back of the game board 1. First, the game board 1 will be explained. The game board 1 is made of a transparent synthetic resin board. An opening 1A is formed approximately in the center of the game board 1 and is approximately circular when viewed from the front.

On the front surface of the game board 1, a substantially ring-shaped center decoration body 61 is formed to protrude forward along the opening 1A. Further, on the outside of the center decoration body 61, there is an outer rail 62 formed in a substantially ring shape so as to largely surround the center decoration body 61, and an outer rail 62 between the left side portion of the outer rail 62 and the center decoration body 61. 62 and a curved inner rail 63 substantially parallel to the center decorative body 61.

On the front surface of the game board 1, an area surrounded by the center decoration body 61, the outer rail 62, the inner rail 63, etc. forms the game area 6. That is, the front surface of the game board 1 is divided into the game area 6 and other areas by the center decoration body 61, the outer rail 62, and the inner rail 63. Further, the area surrounded by the outer rail 62 and the inner rail 63 forms a firing area 7 through which the fired game balls can pass to head toward the gaming area 6.

The game area 6 is an area into which game balls fired by operating the handle 72k can flow down, and is provided for playing games in the pachinko game machine PY. Note that a large number of game nails (not shown) are provided protruding from the game area 6. The game nails are used to properly control game balls that enter the game area 6 and flow down the game area 6 into the general prize opening 10, the first starting opening 11, the second starting opening 12, the gate 13, the big winning opening 14, etc. It constitutes a route that leads to.

A general winning device 10D is provided at a predetermined position in the gaming area 6. In the general winning device 10D, a general winning opening 10 is formed so that a game ball can be entered. When the game balls enter the general winning hole 10, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In addition, the game ball that entered the general winning hole 10 is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as it is.

Further, a first starting winning device 11D is provided directly below the center of the center decoration body 61 in the gaming area 6. The first starting winning device 11D has a first starting opening 11 formed into which a game ball can enter. The first starting winning device 11D has a non-operating structure. Therefore, the ease with which the game ball enters the first starting port 11 remains constant (unchanged). When the game balls enter the first starting port 11, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In addition, the game ball that entered the first starting port 11 is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as it is.

Note that a warp portion 61w is formed from the left side to the lower end of the center decoration body 61 to allow the game ball to pass therethrough. An entrance to the warp portion 61w is formed on the left side of the center decorative body 61. The game ball that has entered the warp section 61w passes through the inside of the warp section 61w and exits from the exit. A stage 61s on which a game ball can roll is provided near the exit of the warp section 61w and on the upper surface of the lower end of the center decorative body 61. A downward guide portion 61y that guides the game ball downward is provided at the tip of the stage 61s. A first starting port 11 is provided directly below this downward guide portion 61y.

Directly below the first starting port 11 in the gaming area 6, a second starting winning device (so-called "electric chew") 12D is provided. The electric chew 12D is formed with a second starting port 12 that can be changed into a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter and an open state in which a game ball can enter. The second starting port 12 takes a closed mode and an open mode by an electric tube opening/closing member 12k included in the electric tube 12D. That is, the second starting port 12 is opened and closed by the operation of the electric chew opening/closing member 12k.

The electric chew opening/closing member 12k is a substantially L-shaped member when viewed from the front, and normally closes the second starting port 12. The electric chew opening/closing member 12k can protrude forward from the retracted state in which the front end surface is flush with the gaming area 6. When the electric chew opening/closing member 12k protrudes forward, the electric chew opening/closing member 12k is in a state of protruding perpendicularly to the gaming area 6, and the second starting port 12 is opened to allow entry of a ball. Specifically, the vertical portion erected at the left end of the horizontal portion of the electric chew opening/closing member 12k receives the game ball, and is guided from the horizontal portion to the second starting port 12.

In this way, the game ball can enter the second starting port 12 only when the electric chew opening/closing member 12k is in the open state. When the game balls enter the second starting port 12, a predetermined number (for example, two) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In addition, the game ball that entered the second starting port 12 is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as it is.

Further, a gate 13 is provided on the right side of the center decorative body 61. The gate 13 is configured to allow game balls to pass through. Even if the game ball passes through the gate 13, the prize ball is not paid out. Note that the game ball that has passed through the gate 13 flows down the game area 6 as it is.

On the right side of the first starting winning device 11D in the gaming area 6 and on the downstream side of the gate 13, a big winning device 14D is provided. The grand prize winning device 14D is formed with a grand prize opening 14 that can be changed into a closed mode in which a game ball cannot enter and an open mode in which a game ball can enter. The big prize opening 14 takes a closed mode and an open mode by an AT opening/closing member 14k included in the big winning device 14D. That is, the big prize opening 14 is opened and closed by the operation of the AT opening/closing member 14k.

The AT opening/closing member 14k is a movable member made of a flat plate having a generally horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and normally closes the big prize opening 14. A horizontal rotating shaft is provided at the lower end of the AT opening/closing member 14k. The AT opening/closing member 14k can be rotated approximately 90 degrees around its rotation axis so that its upper end is tilted forward. When the AT opening/closing member 14k rotates, the AT opening/closing member 14k comes into a state of protruding perpendicularly to the gaming area 6, and the big prize opening 14 is opened to allow entry of a ball.

In this way, the game ball can enter the big prize opening 14 only when the AT opening/closing member 14k is in the open state. When the game balls enter the grand prize opening 14, a predetermined number (nine in the basic embodiment) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In addition, the game ball that entered the big prize opening 14 is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as it is.

Further, below the big winning device 14D in the gaming area 6, the upper surface thereof is formed diagonally downward to the left, and a guiding path 64 for guiding the game ball to the second starting port 12 is provided in the gaming area 6 (the front surface of the gaming board 1). It is provided so as to protrude forward from the front. Note that the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the guide path 64 can flow down toward the second starting port 12, but basically cannot enter the first starting port 11.

In addition, the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 11, the second starting port 12, the big winning port 14, and the general winning port 10, and the passage of the gaming ball through the gate 13 are collectively described as the first starting port 11, They are collectively referred to as "winning" to the second starting opening 12, the big winning opening 14, the general winning opening 10, and the gate 13.

By the way, the game area 6 in which the game ball can flow down can be divided into a left game area 6A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction, and a right game area 6B on the right side. The manner in which the handle 72k is operated to launch the game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area 6A is referred to as "left-handed hitting". On the other hand, the manner in which the handle 72k is operated to shoot the game ball so that the game ball flows down the right game area 6B is referred to as "right-handed hitting".

In the gaming area 6, the flow path through which the game ball can flow down when the game ball is fired with left-hand hitting is called the first flow path R1, and the game ball can flow down when the game ball is fired with right-hand hitting. This flow path is called a second flow path R2. The first passage R1 and the second passage R2 are also constituted by a large number of game nails (not shown).

A first starting port 11 and two general winning ports 10 are provided on the first flow path R1. Therefore, the player can aim to win a prize in the first starting opening 11 or the general winning opening 10 by shooting the game ball so as to flow down the first channel R1 by hitting the ball to the left. On the other hand, a second starting port 12, a gate 13, and a big winning port 14 are provided on the second flow path R2. Therefore, the player can aim to win a prize in the gate 13, the second starting opening 12, or the big prize opening 14 by firing the game ball so as to flow down the second flow path R2 by hitting the ball to the right.

In addition, at approximately the bottom of the gaming area 6, two out ports 19 are provided for discharging game balls that are hit into the gaming area 6 but do not win in any of the winning holes to the outside of the gaming area 6. There is. Further, the number of prize balls that are won in each winning hole can be set as appropriate.

Next, the board effect unit EU attached to the back of the game board 1 will be explained. The board effect unit EU is a unit made up of a plurality of devices that mainly perform effects. An image display device 50 and a board moving device 55 are attached to the board presentation unit EU.

The image display device 50 is configured with a 20-inch 3D liquid crystal display, and includes a display section 50a capable of displaying 3D images. The image display device 50 is placed several centimeters behind the game board 1.

The board movable device 55 includes an operable board movable body 55k. The platen movable body 55k includes a horizontally long plate-shaped elevating member 55k2 maintained in a horizontal state, and a substantially elliptical rotating member 55k1 provided at the center of the elevating member 55k2 in the left-right direction. The board movable body 55k is arranged between the game board 1 and the image display device 50. In the standby state where the board movable body 55k is placed in the initial position, the lower end portion of the board movable body 55k, specifically the lower end portion of the rotating member 55k1, is slightly downwardly moved from the upper end of the opening 1A of the game board 1. positioned. That is, the board movable body 55k is arranged so that in the standby state, only a part of the lower end of the rotating member 55k1 is visible to the player, and the majority is invisible to the player (see FIG. 3(A)).

Then, the movable plate 55k can be lowered as a whole from the initial position to a predetermined operating position, and raised from the operating position to return to the initial position (see FIG. 3(B)). The predetermined operating position is a position where the platen movable body 55k is located approximately at the center of the opening 1A when viewed from the front. Here, the predetermined work position can be set as appropriate, and may be a position where the movable plate 55k is located above or below the approximate center of the opening 1A when viewed from the front. good.

Further, the rotating member 55k1 can rotate clockwise and counterclockwise when viewed from the front about a rotating shaft formed in the front-rear direction at its center (see FIG. 3(C)). Note that the rotational movement of the rotating member 55k1 can be performed when the movable platen body 55k moves from the standby position to the operating position, while being held at the operating position, and when moving from the operating position to the standby position.

Note that the positions and numbers of members and devices provided in the game board unit YU can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Next, a description will be given of the display devices 8 disposed to the right of approximately the center in the vertical direction of the game area 6 formed on the front surface of the game board 1 (the part other than the game area 6). As shown in FIG. 4, the displays 8 include a special pattern 1 display 81a that variably displays a first special pattern (hereinafter referred to as "special pattern 1"), a second special pattern (hereinafter referred to as "special pattern 2") ''), and a regular symbol display 82 that variably displays a regular symbol (hereinafter referred to as "common symbol"). In addition, the display devices 8 include a special figure 1 holding display 83a that displays the number of special drawings 1 held, which will be described later, and a special drawing 2 holding display 83b, which displays the number of special drawings 2 holding, which will be described later. .

The variable display of the special figure 1 is executed when the special figure 1 lottery is carried out triggered by the winning of a game ball in the first starting hole 11. Further, the variable display of the special figure 2 is executed when the special figure 2 lottery is held triggered by the winning of a game ball into the second starting hole 12. The special drawing 1 lottery and the special drawing 2 drawing will be described later. In addition, in the following explanation, special map 1 and special map 2 will be collectively referred to as "special map", and special map 1 lottery and special map 2 lottery will be collectively referred to as "special map lottery". In addition, the special figure 1 display 81a and the special figure 2 display 81b are collectively referred to as the "special figure display 81." Furthermore, the special figure 1 reservation display 83a and the special figure 2 reservation display 83b are collectively referred to as the "special figure reservation display 83."

The variable display of the special figure notifies the result of the special figure lottery. In the variable display of the special figure, the special figure is displayed in a variable manner and then stopped. The special figure that is stopped and displayed (stopped special figure) is identification information representing the result of the special figure lottery derived as the display result of the variable display. When the stopped and displayed special figure is a predetermined specific special figure, a jackpot game with opening of the jackpot 14 is performed.

The special figure 1 display 81a and the special figure 2 display 81b are each composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side. The lighting mode of the special figure 1 display 81a and the special figure 2 display 81b represents the special figure according to the result of the special figure lottery, that is, the result of the special figure lottery. For example, if the result of the special drawing lottery is a jackpot, the final result will be "□□■■□□■■" (□: lit, ■: off), 1st, 2nd, 5th, 6th from the left. An LED lights up. This lighting mode is a jackpot symbol and represents a jackpot. In addition, if the result of the special drawing lottery is a loss, only the LED on the far right lights up as "■■■■■■■□". This lighting mode is a losing pattern and represents a losing pattern. Note that the lighting mode of the LED corresponding to the result of the special drawing lottery is not limited and can be set as appropriate. Therefore, for example, all the LEDs may be turned off as a losing symbol.

Furthermore, in the variable display of the special figure, the special figure is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined variable time before the special figure is stopped and displayed. The manner in which the special figure is displayed in a variable manner is, for example, a manner in which each LED lights up so that light repeatedly flows from left to right. Note that the mode of the variable display is not particularly limited, and may be set as appropriate, such as all the LEDs blinking at once unless each LED is displayed in a stopped state (lit display in a specific mode).

By the way, in the pachinko game machine PY, even if a game ball enters the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12, the special drawing lottery and the variable display of the special drawing may not be performed immediately. Specifically, this is the case when a game ball enters the first starting hole 11 or the second starting hole 12 during execution of variable display of special figures or during execution of a jackpot game. In this case, the special drawing lottery and the variable display of the special drawing are suspended based on the winning prize. This reserved special drawing drawing and the variable display of the special drawing are called "special drawing reservation."

The special drawing reservation includes the special drawing 1 drawing that was held based on the prize won in the first starting opening 11, and "special drawing 1 pending" which represents the variable display of the special drawing 1, and the winning winning in the second starting opening 12. There is a special drawing 2 lottery held based on , and a "special drawing 2 pending" representing a variable display of special drawing 2. Then, the special figure 1 pending display 83a displays the number of special figure 1 pending, that is, the number of reserved special figure 1 drawings and variable displays of special figure 1. On the other hand, the special figure 2 pending display 83b displays the number of special figure 2 reservations, that is, the number of reserved special figure 2 drawings and the number of variable displays of special figure 2.

It is also possible to set an upper limit on the number of special figure 1 reservations and the number of special figure 2 reservations, or not to set them. In addition, when setting upper limits to the number of special symbols 1 and 2 reserved, the number of special symbols 1 and 2 can be the same or different. In addition, in the basic embodiment, it is assumed that the upper limit of the number of special drawings 1 and the number of special drawings 2 being held is set to "4".

Each of the special figure 1 hold indicator 83a and the special figure 2 hold indicator 83b is composed of four LEDs, and the special figure is displayed by lighting up the LEDs for the number of special figure 1 hold and special figure 2 hold. Displays the number of Figure 1 reservations and Special Figure 2 reservations. In addition, in the following, the number of special drawings 1 reserved is referred to as "the number of special symbols 1 reserved (U1)", and the number of special symbols 2 reserved is referred to as "the number of special symbols 2 reserved (U2)". In addition, the "number of reserved special drawings 1" and "number of reserved special drawings 2" are collectively referred to as the "number of reserved special drawings." Furthermore, the "special figure 1 holding display 83a" and the "special drawing 2 holding display 83b" are collectively referred to as the "special drawing holding display 83."

Further, the variable display of the common symbol is executed when a common symbol lottery is held triggered by the winning of a game ball at the gate 13. The variable display of the common map notifies the result of the common map lottery. In the variable display of a general map, the general map is displayed in a variable manner and then stopped. The stationary displayed ordinary map (stopped ordinary map) is identification information representing the result of the ordinary map lottery drawn as a display result of the variable display. When the stopped and displayed general figure is a predetermined specific ordinary figure, an auxiliary game accompanied by opening of the second starting port 12 is performed.

The general figure display 82 is composed of, for example, two LEDs. The lighting mode of the general map display device 82 represents the general map corresponding to the result of the general map lottery, that is, the result of the general map lottery. If the result of the general lottery is a win, both LEDs will eventually light up as "□□" (□: lit, ■: off). This lighting mode is a winning symbol and represents a win. Furthermore, if the result of the general drawing lottery is a loss, only the right LED will finally light up, such as "■□". This lighting mode is a losing pattern and represents a losing pattern. Note that the lighting mode of the LED corresponding to the result of the general drawing lottery is not limited and can be set as appropriate. For example, a mode may be adopted in which all the LEDs are turned off as a losing symbol.

Further, before the regular map is stopped and displayed, the regular map is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined variable time. In the basic embodiment, the mode of fluctuating display of the common map is such that both LEDs are lit alternately. Note that the mode of the fluctuating display of the general map is not particularly limited, and may be set as appropriate, such as all the LEDs flashing at once if each LED is not displayed in a stopped state (lit display in a specific mode). .

2. Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PY will be explained based on FIGS. 5 to 7. As shown in FIG. 5, on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine PY, there is a game control board 100 that performs control (progress of the game) related to games that can obtain gaming profits, and a Power is supplied to the production control board 120 that controls the production, the image control board 140 that controls images, the payout control board 170 that controls the payout of game balls, and each of the boards 100, 120, 140, and 170. A power supply board 190 is attached.

A power switch 191 is connected to the power supply board 190. The ON/OFF operation of the power switch 191 switches the power on/off.

As shown in FIG. 6, a game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as "game control microcomputer") 101 is mounted on the game control board 100, which controls the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine PY according to a program. Therefore, the game control board 100 can be positioned as a game control section that controls games. In addition, games in which gaming profits can be obtained that are controlled by the game control board 100 include special drawing lottery, variable display of special drawings, jackpot games, game state setting described later, general drawing lottery, and variable display of normal drawings. , auxiliary games, etc.

The game control microcomputer 101 includes a game ROM (Read Only Memory) 103 that stores programs, tables, etc. for controlling the progress of the game, a game RAM (Random Access Memory) 104 used as a work memory, and a game RAM (Random Access Memory) 104 that is used as a work memory. A gaming CPU (Central Processing Unit) 102 that executes a program stored in a ROM 103 is included.

The game ROM 103 stores programs for performing game control main processing, game control side timer interrupt processing, etc., which will be described later. In addition, the gaming ROM 103 includes a jackpot determination table, a jackpot symbol type determination table, a reach determination table, a special pattern variation pattern determination table, a look-ahead determination table, a jackpot game control table, a game state setting table, a hit determination table, and an auxiliary hit determination table, which will be described later. Game control tables, etc. are stored. Note that the gaming ROM 103 may be externally attached.

Further, the gaming RAM 104 is provided with a special figure reservation storage section 105. Here, the special figure reservation storage section 105 will be explained. As mentioned above, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 11 or the second starting hole 12, special drawings can be reserved, but if special drawings can be reserved, that is, if the number of special symbols reserved is When the upper limit has not been reached, determination information consisting of various random numbers for performing a special drawing lottery etc. is obtained based on this winning prize. Then, this determination information is temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage section 105 as a special figure reservation. In addition, in the following, the judgment information obtained by winning the game ball into the first starting port 11 is referred to as "special map 1 related judgment information", and the judgment information obtained by winning the game ball into the second starting port 12. The determination information that is determined is referred to as "special figure 2 related determination information." In addition, the special figure 1 related determination information and the special figure 2 related determination information are collectively referred to as "special figure related determination information."

Then, the special figure 1 related determination information is stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage section 105a in the special figure reservation storage section 105 as the special figure 1 reservation. On the other hand, the special figure 2 related determination information is stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage section 105b in the special figure reservation storage section 105 as the special figure 2 reservation. The number of special figure 1 related determination information that can be stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a, that is, the upper limit of the number of special figure 1 reservations is set to "4". Further, the number of special figure 2 related determination information that can be stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage section 105b, that is, the upper limit of the number of special figure 2 reservations is set to "4".

Further, various sensors and solenoids are connected to the game control board 100 via a predetermined relay board (not shown). Therefore, signals output from various sensors are input to the game control board 100. Moreover, the game control board 100 outputs signals to various actuators.

Various sensors connected to the game control board 100 include a general winning opening sensor 10a, a first starting opening sensor 11a, a second starting opening sensor 12a, a gate sensor 13a, and a big winning opening sensor 14a. .

The general winning hole sensor 10a detects a game ball that has won a prize in the general winning hole 10. The first starting port sensor 11a detects a game ball that has won a prize in the first starting port 11. The second starting port sensor 12a detects a game ball that has won a prize in the second starting port 12. The gate sensor 13a detects the game ball that has passed through the gate 13. The big winning hole sensor 14a detects the game ball that has entered the big winning hole 14.

Further, various actuators connected to the game control board 100 include an electric chew solenoid 12s and an AT solenoid 14s. The electric chew solenoid 12s drives the electric chew opening/closing member 12k of the electric chew 12D. The AT solenoid 14s drives the AT opening/closing member 14k of the big winning device 14D.

In addition, the type and number of sensors connected to the game control board 100 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game. Further, the type and number of actuators connected to the game control board 100 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Further, the game control board 100 is connected to display devices 8 (a special figure display 81, a regular figure display 82, and a special figure pending display 83). Display control of these displays 8 is performed by a game control microcomputer 101.

Further, the game control board 100 transmits various commands to the payout control board 170, and receives signals from the payout control board 170 for payout monitoring. A card unit CU and a payout device 73 are connected to the payout control board 170, and a firing device 72 is also connected thereto. Further, the card unit CU is a device that is installed adjacent to the pachinko game machine PY and allows balls to be rented based on information such as an inserted prepaid card.

The payout control board 170 drives the payout motor 73m of the payout device 73 to pay out prize balls and rental balls based on signals from the game control microcomputer 101 and signals from the connected card unit CU. The prize balls and rental balls that are paid out are detected by a payout sensor 73a for counting them.

Further, the firing device 72 is a device that fires game balls. The handle 72k constitutes an operation section or an input section that receives an operation for causing the shooting device 72 to shoot a game ball, and is included in the shooting device 72. The handle 72k is provided with a touch switch 72a that can detect a contact of a person such as a player with the handle 72k. When the player operates the handle 72k, the touch switch 72a detects the player's contact with the handle 72k, and outputs a detection signal to the payout control board 170 via the release control circuit 175.

Furthermore, a firing volume knob 72b that can detect the rotation angle (operation amount) of the handle 72k is connected to the handle 72k. The firing device 72 drives the firing motor 72m so that the game ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 72k detected by the firing volume knob 72b. In the pachinko game machine PY, one game ball is fired approximately every 0.6 seconds while the rotational operation of the handle 72k is maintained. In addition, within the rotatable range of the handle 72k,

Further, the game control board 100 transmits various commands including information regarding the game to the performance control board 120 in accordance with the progress of the game. The production control board 120 can grasp the progress of the game (game control content) by the game control board 100 based on various commands sent from the game control board 100.

The connection between the game control board 100 and the production control board 120 is a unidirectional communication connection that allows only the transmission of signals from the game control board 100 to the production control board 120. That is, between the game control board 100 and the performance control board 120, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode), not shown, is interposed as a communication direction regulating means.

As shown in FIG. 7, the performance control board 120 is equipped with a performance control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as "performance control microcomputer") 121 that controls the performance of the pachinko game machine PY according to a program. The production control board 120 can be positioned as a production control unit that controls production, together with an image control board 140, an audio control circuit 161, and a sub-drive board 162, which will be described later. However, the performance control section includes at least a performance control board 120, and performs game performance, customer waiting performance, and operation promotion using performance devices (image display device 50, speaker 52, frame lamp 53, board movable body 55k, etc.). It is sufficient if it is possible to control the presentation.

The performances that are controlled by the performance control board 120 include game performances (special figure fluctuation performances, hold performances, jackpot game performances, etc.), customer waiting performances, and operations of the first performance button 40k and the second performance button 41k. It includes operation promotion effects that encourage operation during the valid period (operation valid period).

The performance control microcomputer 121 includes a performance ROM 123 that stores a program for controlling the performance as the game progresses by the game control board 100, a performance RAM 124 used as a work memory, and a performance ROM 123 that stores programs. It includes a presentation CPU 122 that executes a program.

The production ROM 123 stores programs for performing production control main processing, reception interrupt processing, 1ms timer interrupt processing, 10ms timer interrupt processing, etc., which will be described later. Note that the performance ROM 123 may be externally attached.

The performance RAM 124 includes a starting winning command suspension storage section 125 that stores starting winning commands that will be described later, a symbol designation command storage section 126 that stores symbol designation commands that will be described later, and a special symbol that stores special symbol fluctuation start commands that will be described later. A fluctuation start command storage section 127 is provided.

Further, an image control board 140 is connected to the effect control board 120. The performance control microcomputer 121 of the performance control board 120 controls the display of the image display device 50 on the image control board 140 based on commands received from the game control board 100, that is, according to the progress of the game by the game control board 100. Have them do it. Note that the connection between the production control board 120 and the image control board 140 allows both the transmission of signals from the production control board 120 to the image control board 140 and the transmission of signals from the image control board 140 to the production control board 120. This is a two-way communication connection.

The image control board 140 includes an image ROM 142 that stores programs for image control, an image RAM 143 used as a work memory, and an image CPU 141 that executes the programs stored in the image ROM 142. . The image control board 140 also includes a CGROM (Character Generator Read Only Memory) 145 that stores image data to be displayed on the image display device 50, and a VRAM (Video Memory) that is used to expand the image data stored in the CGROM 145. Random Access Memory) 146 and VDP (Video Display Processor) 144. All or a portion of these electronic components may be configured in one chip.

The CGROM 145 stores, for example, image data (still image data and video data, specifically characters, items, designs, figures, characters, numbers, symbols, etc.) for displaying images displayed on the image display device 50. (including designs) and image data such as background images) are stored.

The VDP 144 reads image data from the CGROM 145 and develops it in a development area in the VRAM 146 in accordance with a display list created by the image CPU 141 based on instructions from the performance control microcomputer 121. Then, the expanded image data is appropriately combined and an image is drawn in the frame buffer in the VRAM 146. The image drawn in the frame buffer is then output to the image display device 50 as an RGB signal. As a result, various effect images are displayed on the display section 50a.

Note that the display list is composed of a group of commands for instructing execution of drawing in units of frames. The display list includes information on various parameters such as the type of image to be drawn, the position at which the image is drawn, display priority, display magnification, and image transmittance.

In addition, the performance control microcomputer 121 outputs audio, music, and music from the speaker 52 via the audio control circuit 161 based on commands received from the game control board 100, that is, according to the progress of the game by the game control board 100. Output sound effects, etc.

Audio data such as audio output from the speaker 52 is stored in the performance ROM 123 of the performance control board 120. Note that the audio control circuit 161 may be configured with a board and a CPU may be mounted thereon. In this case, the CPU may be caused to perform voice control. Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the board and audio data may be stored in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 52 may be connected to the image control board 140 and the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 may be caused to perform audio control. Furthermore, in this case, the audio data may be stored in the image ROM 142 of the image control board 140.

Further, various sensors serving as input units and various actuators serving as drive sources are connected to the production control board 120 via a predetermined relay board (not shown). Signals output from various sensors are input to the production control board 120. Moreover, the production control board 120 outputs signals to various actuators.

Various switches connected to the performance control board 120 include a first performance button sensor 40a and a second performance button sensor 41a. The first performance button sensor 40a detects that the first performance button 40k is pressed. The second performance button sensor 41a detects that the second performance button 41k is pressed. When the first performance button sensor 40a and the second performance button sensor 41a detect that each has been operated, they output a signal to the performance control board 120 according to the detected content.

Note that the type and number of switches connected to the performance control board 120 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game. Further, the type and number of actuators connected to the production control board 120 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

The various actuators connected to the production control board 120 include a motor 55m1 for rotating the board movable body, and a motor 55m2 for lifting and lowering the board movable body. The plate movable body rotation motor 55m1 can drive the rotating member 55k1 to rotate the rotating member 55k1. The board movable body lifting motor 55m2 can raise or lower the lifting member 55k2. In detail, the performance control microcomputer 121 creates operation pattern data that determines the operation mode of the rotating member 55k1 and the lifting member 55k2, and controls the operation of the rotating member 55k1 and the lifting member 55k2 via the sub-drive board 162. .

In addition, below, the operation|movement of "the rotating member 55k1 and the elevating member 55k2" may be collectively called "the operation|movement of the board movable body 55k." Furthermore, rotating the rotary member 55k1 and lowering or raising the elevating member 55k2 are also referred to as "rotating, lowering, or raising the movable platen body 55k."

Further, the performance control microcomputer 121 controls the lighting of the frame lamp 53 and the like via the sub-drive board 162 based on commands received from the game control board 100. In detail, the performance control microcomputer 121 creates light emission pattern data (data that determines lighting/extinguishing, emission color, etc., also referred to as lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of the frame lamp 53, and controls the frame lamp 53 according to the light emission pattern data. Control light emission. Note that data stored in the performance ROM 123 of the performance control board 120 is used to create the light emission pattern data.

Note that the sub-drive board 162 may be configured with a board and the CPU may be mounted thereon. In this case, the CPU may control the lighting of the frame lamp 53 and the like and control the operation of the panel movable body 55k. Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the board and data regarding the light emission pattern and the operation pattern may be stored in the ROM.

3. Main Games Played by the Gaming Machine Next, the main games played by the Pachinko gaming machine PY will be explained using FIGS. 8 to 15.

3-1. Games related to common figures First, games related to common figures will be explained. The pachinko game machine PY can execute a regular lottery when the fired game balls pass through the gate 13. When the general drawing lottery is performed, the normal drawing is displayed variably (variably displayed and then stopped) on the general drawing display 82. Here, the regular symbols that are stopped and displayed include winning symbols and losing symbols. In addition, the losing pattern of the regular pattern is also called "losing pattern" to distinguish it from the losing pattern of the special pattern described later.

When the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the auxiliary game is executed, and the game related to passing through the gate 13 ends. On the other hand, when the losing common map is stopped and displayed, the auxiliary game is not performed and the game related to passing through the gate 13 ends. In addition, hereinafter, the fact that the game ball passes through the gate 13 when the variable display of the normal pattern or the auxiliary game is not being played will be referred to as "establishment of the normal pattern fluctuation starting condition."

The pachinko gaming machine PY performs a series of games such as variable display of general drawings and auxiliary games based on the general drawing start condition being satisfied, obtaining general drawing related determination information, and performing general drawing lottery. I can do it. The acquired ordinary symbol related determination information includes ordinary symbol random numbers, as shown in FIG. 8(A). The normal symbol random number is a random number (judgment information) for making a hit determination. Each random number has an appropriate range.

3-1-1. Win Determination The win determination is a determination for determining whether or not there is a win (whether or not to execute the auxiliary game) using a hit determination table as shown in FIG. 9(A), for example. The hit determination table can be associated with a gaming state that will be described later. When associated with the gaming state, the hit determination table includes a hit determination table used in the non-time saving state (non-time saving hit determination table) and a hit determination table used in the time saving state (time saving hit determination table).

In each hit determination table, determination values of normal symbol random numbers (normal symbol random number determination values) are appropriately distributed to hits and losses that are the results of the hit determination. Therefore, the pachinko game machine PY compares the acquired normal symbol random number with the hit determination table to determine whether it is a hit or a loss. If the result of the hit determination is a hit, the winning symbol is stopped and displayed on the variable display of the common symbol. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination is a loss, the losing common map is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the common symbol. Note that the winning probability can be changed as appropriate.

3-1-2. Ordinary Figure Fluctuation Pattern Determination/Ordinary Figure Variable Display Ordinary Figure Fluctuation Pattern Judgment is a determination for determining the Ordinary Figure Fluctuation Pattern by using the Ordinary Figure Fluctuation Pattern Determination Table as shown in FIG. 9(B), for example. The ordinary figure fluctuation pattern is identification information regarding predetermined matters related to variable display of ordinary figures, such as ordinary figure fluctuation time.

The regular figure fluctuation pattern determination table can be associated with the gaming state (non-time saving state/time saving state). When associated with the gaming state (non-time saving state/time saving state), the regular pattern fluctuation pattern determination table includes the regular pattern fluctuation pattern determination table (non-time saving regular pattern fluctuation pattern determination table) used in the non-time saving state and the regular pattern fluctuation pattern determination table used in the non-time saving state. There is a regular figure fluctuation pattern determination table (time-saving regular figure fluctuation pattern determination table) that is used in the state.

Each ordinary figure fluctuation pattern determination table stores one ordinary figure fluctuation pattern, which is the result of ordinary figure fluctuation pattern determination, for each ordinary figure to be stopped. In other words, the pachinko game machine PY is capable of making the normal pattern fluctuation time different between the non-time saving state and the time saving state. For example, in a non-time-saving state, when a losing regular symbol (losing regular symbol) is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the regular symbol is determined to be a regular symbol fluctuation pattern in which the regular symbol fluctuation time is 30 seconds, and the winning symbol is displayed. Regarding the variable display of common figures in the case of stop display, a common figure fluctuation pattern is determined in which the ordinary figure fluctuation time is 30 seconds. In addition, in the time saving state, for the variable display of common symbols when a losing common symbol is stopped and displayed, a common symbol fluctuation pattern in which the common symbol fluctuation time is 5 seconds is determined, and when the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, a common symbol fluctuation pattern is determined. Regarding the variable display, a general pattern fluctuation pattern in which the general pattern fluctuation time is 5 seconds is determined. It should be noted that these general figure fluctuation times can be changed as appropriate.

Then, variable display of the ordinary figure of the ordinary figure fluctuation time associated with the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern determined in the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern determination is performed on the ordinary figure display 82. In this way, by performing the hit determination and the normal pattern variation pattern determination, the normal pattern is variably displayed on the normal pattern display 82.

3-1-3. Auxiliary Game The auxiliary game is a variable display of a common symbol, and is executed when a winning symbol is stopped and displayed (derived) as a display result (result of a common symbol lottery). In the auxiliary game, the electric chew 12D is released.

The elements constituting the auxiliary game (auxiliary game component) include various elements such as the number of times the electric chew 12D is opened and the opening time for each opening. Pachinko game machine PY controls the auxiliary game using the auxiliary game control table. The auxiliary game control table stores auxiliary game components. For example, as shown in FIG. 9(C), it is possible to associate the gaming state (non-time saving state/time saving state) with the auxiliary game control table. That is, it is possible to associate the auxiliary game component with the game state (non-time saving state/time saving state). Note that the specific contents of each element, such as the number of openings and the opening time, can be changed as appropriate.

The pachinko game machine PY can make the opening time of the electric chew 12D different between the auxiliary game in the non-time-saving state and the auxiliary game in the time-saving state. For example, in an auxiliary game in a non-time saving state, the electric chew 12D is opened for a first opening time such as 0.2 seconds during which it is difficult for the electric chew 12D to win a game ball. On the other hand, in the auxiliary game in the time saving state, for example, if the game ball is opened twice for 2.5 seconds with a 1.0 second interval (closed) in between, the first opening time is longer than the first opening time, and the game ball enters the electric chew 12D. The electric chew 12D is opened only for the second opening time which is easy to open.

Note that, hereinafter, the auxiliary game in the non-time saving state is also referred to as the "short opening auxiliary game". On the other hand, the auxiliary game in the time saving state is also referred to as the "long opening auxiliary game". In addition, the opening time for each auxiliary game is the total time for that auxiliary game, and for example, it may be opened multiple times in one auxiliary game, such as opening once and then opening again after a closing interval. It may be configured as follows.

3-2. Games Related to Special Figures Next, games related to special figures will be explained. The pachinko game machine PY can execute the special drawing 1 lottery when the fired game ball enters the first starting hole 11. When the special figure 1 lottery is carried out, the special figure 1 is displayed variably on the special figure 1 display 81a (stop display after a variable display is performed) to notify the result of the special figure 1 lottery. Here, the special symbols 1 that are stopped and displayed include jackpot symbols and losing symbols. That is, the results of the special drawing 1 lottery include jackpots and losses.

When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is executed, a new gaming state is set, and the game based on the winning prize ends. Furthermore, when the losing symbols are stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is not played and the game based on the winning prize ends.

Similarly, the pachinko game machine PY can execute the special drawing 2 lottery when the fired game ball enters the second starting slot 12. When the special figure 2 lottery is performed, the special figure 2 is displayed variably (stopped after being displayed variablely) on the special figure 2 display 81b to notify the result of the special figure 2 lottery. Here, the special symbols 2 that are stopped and displayed include jackpot symbols and losing symbols. That is, the result of the special drawing 2 lottery includes a jackpot and a loss.

When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is executed, a new gaming state is set, and the game based on the winning prize ends. Furthermore, when the losing symbols are stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is not played, and the game based on the winning prize ends.

In addition, in the following, when a game ball enters the first starting port 11, it is referred to as "establishment of the first starting condition", and when a gaming ball enters the second starting port 12, it is referred to as "establishment of the second starting condition". That's what it means. Further, "the first starting condition is met" and "the second starting condition is met" are collectively referred to as "the starting condition is met." In addition, the losing symbols of the special symbols are also referred to as "losing special symbols" to distinguish them from the losing symbols of the above-mentioned ordinary symbols.

The pachinko game machine PY performs a series of games such as a variable display of special symbols and a jackpot game based on the establishment of a starting condition, the acquisition of special symbol related determination information, and the performance of a special symbol lottery. Then, in order to perform variable display of the special figure, various determinations are made regarding the special figure related determination information. As shown in FIG. 8(B), the acquired special symbol related determination information includes a special symbol random number, a jackpot symbol type random number, a reach random number, and a special symbol variation pattern random number.

The special symbol random number is a random number (determination information) for determining a jackpot. The jackpot symbol type random number is a random number (judgment information) for determining the jackpot symbol type. The reach random number is a random number (judgment information) for performing reach determination. The special symbol variation pattern random number is a random number (judgment information) for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. Each random number has an appropriate range. Next, each determination made using the special figure related determination information will be explained.

3-2-1. Jackpot Judgment The jackpot judgment is to use a jackpot judgment table to determine whether or not it is a jackpot (whether or not to execute a jackpot game), in other words, whether it is a jackpot or a loss. For example, as shown in FIG. 10(A), the jackpot determination table can be provided in association with a gaming state to be described later. Specifically, the jackpot determination table includes a jackpot determination table used in the normal probability state (hereinafter referred to as "normal probability jackpot determination table") described later, and a jackpot determination table (hereinafter referred to as "jackpot determination table for normal probability") used in the high probability state described later. , "high probability jackpot determination table").

In each jackpot determination table associated with the gaming state, special symbol random number determination values (special symbol random number determination values) are assigned to jackpots and losses that are the results of the jackpot determination. The pachinko game machine PY compares the acquired special symbol random number with the jackpot determination table associated with the gaming state to determine whether it is a jackpot or a loss. As shown in FIG. 10(A), the high probability jackpot determination table has more special symbol random number determination values that are determined to be a jackpot than the normal probability jackpot determination table.

It should be noted that the method of allocating the special symbol random number determination value to the jackpot probability and the determination results of various jackpot determinations can be changed as appropriate.

3-2-2. Jackpot symbol type determination Jackpot symbol type determination determines the type of jackpot symbol (jackpot symbol type) using a jackpot symbol type determination table as shown in FIG. 10(B), for example, when the result of jackpot determination is a jackpot. It is to be. It is possible to associate the type of jackpot symbol with the content of the jackpot, in other words, the constituent elements of the jackpot (content advantageous to the player) consisting of gaming benefits given to the player.

The jackpot symbol type determination table shows the type of special symbol that is variably displayed (special symbol 1/special symbol 2), in other words, the winning pattern that is caused by the jackpot symbol type determination (that caused the jackpot symbol type determination) is associated with the type of starting port (first starting port 11/second starting port 12). That is, the jackpot symbol type determination table includes a jackpot symbol type determination table (first jackpot symbol type determination table) used when performing a variable display of special figure 1, and a jackpot symbol type determination table used when performing a variable display of special figure 2. There is a symbol type determination table (second jackpot symbol type determination table).

Multiple types of jackpot symbols can be set. In each jackpot symbol type determination table, a jackpot symbol type random number determination value (jackpot symbol type random number determination value) is assigned to the jackpot symbol type that is the result of the jackpot symbol type determination. Therefore, the pachinko game machine PY compares the acquired jackpot symbol type random number with the jackpot symbol type determination table to determine the type of jackpot symbol. In the first jackpot symbol type determination table and the second jackpot symbol type determination table, the jackpot symbol type random number determination values are appropriately distributed to various jackpot symbols.

The types of the jackpot symbol of special symbol 1 and the jackpot symbol of special symbol 2 can be set as appropriate, but for example, as in the jackpot symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 10(B), the jackpot symbol of special symbol 1 As such, three types of jackpot symbols are provided: jackpot symbol A, jackpot symbol B, and jackpot symbol C, and three types of jackpot symbols are provided as the jackpot symbol of special pattern 2, jackpot symbol D, jackpot symbol E, and jackpot symbol F. can be provided. Then, like the jackpot symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 10(B), in the first jackpot symbol type determination table and the second jackpot symbol type determination table, the jackpot symbol type random number determination values are appropriately distributed to various jackpot symbols. ing. Note that the distribution rate of the jackpot symbol type can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, the types of jackpot symbols can be increased or decreased as appropriate.

3-2-3. Reach Judgment For reach judgment, for example, when the result of jackpot judgment is a loss, use a reach judgment table as shown in FIG. It is to decide.

The reach determination table can be associated with the gaming state (non-time saving state/time saving state). When associated with a gaming state, for example, the reach determination table includes a reach determination table used in the non-time saving state (non-time saving reach determination table) and a reach determination table used in the time saving state (time saving reach determination table). judgment table).

In each reach determination table, the reach random number determination value (reach random number determination value) is divided into the reach determination results "with reach (reach occurs)" and "without reach (reach does not occur)". There is. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine PY compares the obtained reach random number with the reach determination table and determines whether there is a reach or there is no reach (whether or not a reach occurs).

As shown in FIG. 10(C), the number of reach random number determination values that are determined as "reach exists (reach occurs)" can be made different between the non-time-saving reach determination table and the time-saving reach determination table. It is possible. In addition, in the following, the result of reach determination, which is performed on the premise that the result of jackpot determination is "lose", is referred to as "reach with reach" (reach occurs), and "no reach" is referred to as "reach with reach (reach occurs)". This is sometimes referred to as ``no reach failure.'' Also, a "loss without reach" is sometimes referred to as a "do-no-lose", and a "lose with a reach" is sometimes referred to as a "lose-to-reach".

3-2-4. Special symbol fluctuation pattern determination Special symbol fluctuation pattern determination is performed using special symbol fluctuation pattern determination tables (special symbol fluctuation patterns) as shown in FIGS. The purpose is to determine a variation pattern (special figure variation pattern) of variable display of special figures using a determination table (determination table).

The special figure variation pattern is identification information for identifying predetermined matters regarding the special figure variation time, the so-called "shaku", the production flow (production content) of the special figure variation production described later, etc. In addition, the special figure fluctuation pattern can also include identification information regarding the result of the jackpot determination and the result of the reach determination, in addition to the special figure fluctuation time and the performance flow (performance content) of the special symbol fluctuation performance. In addition, the type and number of special figure fluctuation patterns can be changed as appropriate.

The special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table is based on the type of special symbol (special pattern 1/special pattern 2) that performs variable display that is the target of determination, in other words, the starting opening where the prize was won due to the special pattern fluctuation pattern determination. It is possible to relate to the type (first starting port 11/second starting port 12). That is, the special figure variation pattern judgment table includes a special figure variation pattern judgment table (special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table: Figure 11) used when performing the variable display of special figure 1, and a variable display of special figure 2. There is a special figure variation pattern determination table (special figure 2 variation pattern determination table: FIG. 12) used when performing this.

Each special figure fluctuation pattern determination table can be associated with a gaming state (non-time saving state/time saving state). Specifically, the special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table includes a special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table (non-time saving special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table) used in the non-time saving state and a special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table used in the time saving state. There is a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table (time-saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table). On the other hand, regarding the special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table, there is also a special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table used in the non-time saving state (special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table for non-time saving) and a special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table used in the time saving state. There is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table (time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table).

In addition, each special figure fluctuation pattern determination table associated with the gaming state (non-time saving state/time saving state) can be further associated with the jackpot determination result and the reach determination result. That is, the non-time-saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table and the time-saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table include one for jackpot, one for loss with reach, and one for loss without reach. Similarly, the non-time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table and the time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table include one for jackpots, one for lose with reach, and one for lose without reach.

Furthermore, each special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for no reach and loss associated with the gaming state can also be associated with the number of reserved special figures 1. For example, there is a special pattern 1 fluctuation pattern judgment table for no-reach loss that is used when the number of reserved special symbols 1 (U1) is 0 to 2, and a table that is used when the number of reserved special symbols 1 (U1) is 3 to 4. There is a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for no-reach misses. Similarly, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for each reach-less loss associated with the gaming state can also be associated with the special figure 2 pending number. Specifically, there is a special pattern 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table for no-reach loss that is used when the number of special symbols 2 reserved (U2) is 0 to 2, and a special symbol 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table for no-reach loss that is used when the number of special symbols 2 reserved (U2) is 3 to 4. There is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for no-reach misses that is used for.

Then, the special figure display device 81 displays a variation of the special figure of the special figure variation time according to the special figure variation pattern determined by each special figure variation pattern determination. Then, after the variable display of the special pattern, if the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed as the display result of the special pattern variable display (result of the special pattern lottery), the next variable display of the special pattern will not be performed immediately, and the variable display will continue. , a jackpot game is executed.

Furthermore, it is possible to associate each special figure variation pattern with the production flow of the special figure variation production as shown in the third column from the right in the table of FIGS. 11 and 12. Here, typical effects that constitute the effect flow of the special figure variation effect associated with the special figure variation pattern will be explained.

The performances that make up the performance flow of the special figure variation performance include normal variation, reach, normal reach (N reach), long reach (L reach), special reach (SP reach), and battle performance.

Normal fluctuation indicates that the performance symbols that had been stopped and displayed have started to fluctuate, and each of the performance symbols that make up each production symbol has been fluctuated and displayed at such high speed that it is difficult to recognize, suggesting that the variable display of the special symbol has started. It is a performance that In addition, the special symbol fluctuation performance (the part from the start of the variation of the production pattern to the stop of variation) related to the no-reach loss variation, and the part until the reach is established (confirmed) in the special symbol variation production where the reach occurs, usually fluctuates. It may consist of

In N reach, immediately after a reach is established (confirmed) through normal fluctuations, for example, the production symbols that make up the reach are temporarily stopped at the same position for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds), and the remaining one is This is a performance in which the performance symbols slow down and fluctuate at a slower speed than normal fluctuations. The degree of expectation of a jackpot suggested by N reach is higher than normal fluctuations and lower than L reach and SP reach, which will be described later. When the special symbol fluctuation performance ends at N reach, the remaining one performance symbol that fluctuates at that low speed stops. In the case of a loss, the remaining one performance pattern stops at a performance pattern different from the performance pattern that constitutes the reach. If the special symbol fluctuation performance does not end at N reach, the remaining one performance symbol changes again at high speed, and develops (switches) from N reach to L reach and SP reach while maintaining reach.

L reach is a performance that can be executed both in the case of a jackpot and in the case of a loss, and is a performance that suggests whether or not a jackpot gaming state will occur, and suggests that there is a possibility of a jackpot gaming state. Furthermore, L reach is a performance that can be executed after N reach, for example, and is performed for a longer time than N reach, suggesting that the expectation of a jackpot is higher than N reach. Even in L reach, the established reach is maintained, but the effect symbols that make up the reach are reduced and are moved to a predetermined position that does not interfere with the background image than in the case of N reach (for example, the left effect pattern EZ1 described later is With the right effect pattern EZ3 moved to the upper right of the display section 50a (at the upper left of the display section 50a), the background image is switched to the L reach exclusive background image (the L reach exclusive video is played). Note that in L reach, 2DCG animation images are mainly displayed on the display section 50a. As for the content of L Reach, a video of a scene different from a match related to SP Reach, which will be described later, is displayed, such as the main character undergoing special training to learn a special move.

SP reach is a performance that can be executed both in the case of a jackpot and in the case of a loss, and is a performance that suggests whether or not a jackpot gaming state will occur, and suggests that there is a possibility of a jackpot gaming state. Furthermore, SP reach is a performance that can be executed after, for example, N reach, and is performed for a longer time than L reach, suggesting that the expectation of a jackpot is higher than L reach. Even in SP reach, the established reach is maintained, but the effect symbols that make up the reach are reduced and are moved to a predetermined position that does not interfere with the background image than in the case of N reach (for example, the left effect symbol EZ1 described later is At the upper left of the display section 50a, with the right effect symbol EZ3 moved to the upper right of the display section 50a, the background image is switched to the SP reach-specific background image (the SP reach-specific video is played). Note that in SP reach, 3DCG images are mainly displayed on the display section 50a. As the content of SP Reach, a video of a match between a team to which the main character belongs and a team to which a rival of the main character belongs is displayed.

The battle performance is, for example, a performance that can be executed after reach in a time-saving state, and is a performance that suggests that the jackpot expectation is higher than the normal fluctuation. Even in battle production, the achieved reach is maintained, but the production symbols that make up the reach are reduced and moved to predetermined positions (for example, the left production symbol EZ1 is at the upper left of the display section 50a, and the right production symbol EZ3 is placed at the upper left of the display section 50a. (upper right corner), the background image will switch to the battle production-specific background image (the battle production-specific video will play). Furthermore, in the battle performance, 3DCG images are mainly displayed on the display section 50a.

In addition, in the "state in which the reach is maintained" in the N reach, L reach, SP reach, and battle performance, the performance symbols that constitute the reach in the N reach, L reach, SP reach, and battle performance are displayed on the display section 50a. This includes not only a state where it is visible from the display section 50a, but also a state where the effect pattern constituting the reach is difficult or impossible to see from the display section 50a for a predetermined period of time in relation to a dedicated background image. Further, the contents of the normal variation, N reach, L reach, SP reach, and battle performance can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, the effects that make up the special figure variation effect are not limited to these, and can be added or reduced as appropriate.

In addition, as shown in the second column from the right of the table in FIGS. 11 and 12, it is possible to give a name to the special pattern variation pattern by associating it with the jackpot determination result and the content of the special pattern variation production. . The special pattern variation pattern related to a jackpot is sometimes collectively referred to as a "jackpot variation", and the special pattern variation pattern related to a loss is sometimes collectively referred to as a "loss variation".

Furthermore, the special pattern variation pattern in which SP reach is performed regardless of the jackpot judgment result is "SP reach variation", the special pattern variation pattern in which L reach is performed is "L reach variation", and the special pattern variation pattern in which N reach is performed is special pattern variation. The special pattern variation pattern where the production ends is sometimes collectively referred to as "N reach variation". In addition, loss fluctuations with reach are sometimes referred to as "loss fluctuations with reach", and loss fluctuations without reach are sometimes collectively referred to as "normal loss fluctuations".

3-2-5. Pre-reading Judgment Before making a jackpot judgment, the pachinko gaming machine PY can make a pre-reading judgment based on the acquired special figure related judgment information using a pre-reading judgment table as shown in FIGS. 13 to 14, for example. be. The look-ahead determination table is based on the type of starting opening (first starting opening 11/second starting opening 12) related to the starting winning, in other words, the type of special figure that is variably displayed depending on the starting winning (special drawing 1/special drawing). 2). That is, the pre-reading determination table includes a first pre-reading determination table (FIG. 13) in the case where a prize is won in the first starting opening 11 and a variable display of special drawing 1 is performed, and a first reading determining table (FIG. 13) when a prize is won in the second starting opening 12 and a special drawing is displayed. There is a second look-ahead determination table (FIG. 14) in which variable display of No. 2 is performed. Note that the prefetch determination performed based on the first prefetch determination table is also referred to as a "first prefetch determination," and the prefetch determination performed based on the second prefetch determination table is also referred to as a "second prefetch determination."

Further, the pre-reading determination table can also be associated with gaming states (normal gaming state/high probability high base gaming state/low probability high base gaming state) which will be described later. That is, the lookahead determination table includes a lookahead decision table used in the normal gaming state (a lookahead decision table for normal gaming state), and a lookahead decision table used in the high probability high base game state (high probability high base game state). There is a look-ahead determination table for the state) and a look-ahead determination table for the low probability high base gaming state (a look ahead determination table for the low probability high base gaming state).

In other words, the lookahead determination table includes a first lookahead decision table used in the normal gaming state, a first lookahead decision table used in the high probability high base gaming state, and a first lookahead decision table used in the high probability high base gaming state. A first lookahead determination table used, a second lookahead determination table used in the normal gaming state, a second lookahead determination table used in the high probability high base gaming state, and a second lookahead determination table used in the low probability high base gaming state. There is a second look-ahead determination table used for.

In addition, by the pre-reading determination using the pre-reading determination table shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the special symbol fluctuation pattern related to the variable display of the special symbol performed by winning the starting openings 11 and 12 is specified. That is, before the variable display of the special figure based on the winning is performed, the special figure fluctuation pattern related to the variable display of the special figure is specified as the pre-reading determination result. In the process of specifying the special figure fluctuation pattern, the propriety of the jackpot is also specified as a pre-read determination result.

The pre-reading determination result including information regarding the special figure fluctuation pattern etc. is associated with the start winning command. As will be described later, the start winning command is transmitted to the production control board 120 as a pre-read determination result along with its generation. Note that the type of information to be specified as the prefetch determination result can be changed as appropriate. For example, information regarding the type of jackpot symbol can also be included in the pre-reading determination result.

As described above, a variable display of the special symbol is performed on the special symbol display 81 by performing the jackpot determination, the jackpot symbol type determination, the reach determination, and the special symbol variation pattern determination. Then, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a display result (result of the special symbol lottery) in the variable display of the special symbol, the next special symbol is not variably displayed and the jackpot game is subsequently executed. Next, the jackpot game will be explained.

3-3. Jackpot Game A jackpot game consists of multiple round games involving the opening and closing of the jackpot 14, an opening (also referred to as OP) from the start of the jackpot game until the start of the first round game, and a final round game. It includes an ending (also referred to as ED) from the end of the round game until the end of the jackpot game. Each round game starts with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round game, and ends with the start of the next round game or the start of the ending.

Note that it is possible not to provide OP and ED. Furthermore, hereinafter, a predetermined number of round games (in a predetermined order) will be simply referred to as a "round." For example, the first round game is also referred to as "one round (1R)," and the tenth round game is also referred to as "10 rounds (10R)."

The pachinko game machine PY then controls the jackpot game using the jackpot game control table. The jackpot game control table can be set for each type of jackpot symbol. That is, it is possible to associate a jackpot game with a type of jackpot symbol. One or more types of jackpot games can be set.

The jackpot game control table stores elements constituting the jackpot game (jackpot game constituent elements). The jackpot game components include the number of round games, the number of times the jackpot opening 14 is opened in each round game, the type and opening time (opening pattern) of the jackpot opening for each opening, and the time to be closed until the next opening. (closing time), opening time (opening time), and ending time (ending time).

The pachinko game machine PY can control the jackpot game using a jackpot game control table as shown in FIG. 15(A), for example. That is, it is possible to set the type of jackpot game and the jackpot game components for each jackpot game as shown in FIG. 15(A). Here, the jackpot game set in FIG. 15(A) will be explained.

In the jackpot game associated with jackpot symbol A (hereinafter also referred to as "first jackpot game"), a round game is played 10 times. In each round game from 1R to 10R, the grand prize opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. Furthermore, there is an opening in which the jackpot 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the first jackpot game until the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the jackpot 14 remains closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game until the end of the first jackpot game.

In the jackpot game associated with jackpot symbol B (hereinafter also referred to as "second jackpot game"), a round game is played five times. In each round game from 1R to 5R, the big prize opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. Furthermore, there is an opening in which the jackpot 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the second jackpot game until the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the big prize opening 14 is kept closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game until the end of the second jackpot game.

In the jackpot game associated with jackpot symbol C (hereinafter also referred to as "third jackpot game"), a round game is played five times. In each round game from 1R to 5R, the big prize opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. Furthermore, there is an opening in which the jackpot 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the third jackpot game until the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the big prize opening 14 is kept closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game until the end of the third jackpot game.

In the jackpot game associated with jackpot symbol D (hereinafter also referred to as "fourth jackpot game"), a round game is played 10 times. In each round game from 1R to 10R, the grand prize opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. Furthermore, there is an opening in which the big prize opening 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the fourth jackpot game until the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the big prize opening 14 is kept closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game until the end of the fourth jackpot game.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol E (hereinafter also referred to as "fifth jackpot game"), a round game is played six times. In each round game from 1R to 6R, the big prize opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. Furthermore, there is an opening in which the jackpot 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the fifth jackpot game until the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the grand prize opening 14 is kept closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game until the end of the fifth jackpot game.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol F (hereinafter also referred to as "sixth jackpot game"), a round game is played six times. In each round game from 1R to 6R, the big prize opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the jackpot 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the sixth jackpot game until the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the grand prize opening 14 is kept closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game until the end of the fifth jackpot game.

In addition, in each round game, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are detected by the big winning hole sensor 14a, even before the maximum opening time of the big winning hole 14 has elapsed, the big winning hole is activated. The winning hole 14 is closed and the round game ends. Further, the types and specific contents of the jackpot game components can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, in the jackpot game control table shown in FIG. 15(A), which type of jackpot game will be executed is determined by the type of jackpot symbol, but the jackpot game may be executed by a method different from this. You may also do so. For example, if a device is provided in the gaming area 6 that can allocate the prizes to two winning holes, if a winning hole is won in one of the winning holes, only a jackpot game consisting of a predetermined number of round games will be executed, but if a prize is won in the other winning hole, a predetermined winning hole will be executed. Either a jackpot game consisting of a larger number of round games or a jackpot game consisting of a smaller number of round games than a predetermined number may be executed with a predetermined probability by lottery or the like.

3-4. Game State Next, the game state that can be controlled by the pachinko game machine PY will be explained. The pachinko game machine PY has a jackpot game state in which a jackpot game is being executed and a non-jackpot game state in which a jackpot game is not being executed. The non-jackpot gaming states include a normal gaming state, which is a basic gaming state, and a specific gaming state, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. Factors that are "advantageous to the player" related to this specific gaming state include the jackpot probability and the ease with which the second starting port 12 can be opened. That is, the jackpot probability and the ease of opening the second starting port 12 can be associated with the specific gaming state.

What is advantageous to the player regarding the jackpot probability is that the jackpot probability is higher than in the normal gaming state, and it becomes easier to win the jackpot. Furthermore, the ease of opening the second starting port 12 that is advantageous to the player means that the ease of opening the second starting port 12 is higher than in the normal gaming state, and the second starting port 12 is opened per unit time. This means that it will take longer.

The specific gaming states include a first specific gaming state in which both the jackpot probability and the opening time per unit time of the second starting port 12 are advantageous to the player, and a second specific gaming state in which only the jackpot probability is advantageous to the player. Three types can be set: a specific gaming state and a third specific gaming state in which only the opening time per unit time of the second starting port 12 is advantageous to the player. It should be noted that instead of all of these three types of specific gaming states being installed in the pachinko gaming machine PY, some of the three types of specific gaming states can also be installed.

Here, as a partial gaming state focusing on the jackpot probability, a state where the jackpot probability is higher than the normal gaming state and which is advantageous to the player regarding the jackpot probability is referred to as a "high probability state". On the other hand, the jackpot probability is the normal probability in the normal gaming state, and a state in which the jackpot probability is not advantageous to the player is referred to as a "normal probability state."

In addition, as a partial gaming state that focuses on the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time, a gaming state in which the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time is longer than the normal gaming state is called a "time saving state". Toi. On the other hand, a gaming state in which the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time is the opening time in the normal gaming state is referred to as a "non-time saving state". Here, the fact that the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time becomes longer means that it becomes easier to make the game ball enter the second starting port 12. Therefore, the time saving state can be positioned as a gaming state that is advantageous to the player because it is easier to win a prize to the second starting opening 12 (ease of winning a prize to the second starting opening 12) than the normal gaming state. .

Here, the non-time saving state and the time saving state will be explained in detail. As described above, in the time saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time is longer than in the non-time saving state. That is, the time-saving state is a state in which it is easier to win a prize in the second starting port 12 than in the non-time-saving state. Here, a specific method for making it easier to win a prize in the second starting slot 12 in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state will be described.

For example, by making the time saving state a state in which the normal pattern variation time is likely to be shorter than in the non-time saving state, it is possible to make it easier to win a prize at the second starting port 12 in the time saving state. For example, as mentioned above, regardless of the result of the hit determination, in the time saving state, the normal pattern fluctuation time (5.0 seconds) is shorter than the normal pattern fluctuation time (30.0 seconds) determined in the non-time saving state. Let it be determined. As a result, in the time saving state, the number of times the regular lottery is executed per unit time is greater. In this case, regardless of the difference between the non-time-saving state and the time-saving state, if the probability of winning in the hit judgment and the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game are the same, then the number of regular lottery drawings per unit time is the same. As the number of executions increases, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time becomes longer.

In addition, by making the time saving state a state where the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game is likely to be longer than in the non-time saving state, it is possible to make it easier to win a prize in the second starting port 12 in the time saving state. . For example, as mentioned above, in the non-time saving state, the electric chew 12D opens for 0.2 seconds in one auxiliary game, whereas in the time saving state, the electric chew 12D opens for 5.0 seconds in one auxiliary game. Make it open for seconds. In this case, regardless of the difference between the non-time-saving state and the time-saving state, if the probability of winning in the hit judgment and the normal pattern fluctuation time are the same, the number of times the auxiliary game is executed per unit time will be the same, so once The longer the electric chew 12D is opened in the auxiliary game, the longer the electric chew 12D is opened per unit time.

Furthermore, by making the time-saving state a state in which it is easier to determine a win in the winning determination compared to the non-time-saving state, it is possible to make it easier for the second starting port 12 to win a prize in the time-saving state. For example, as mentioned above, in the non-time-saving state, the probability of winning is determined to be 6600/65536, while in the time-saving state, the probability of winning is determined to be 59936/65536. . In this case, regardless of the difference between the non-time-saving state and the time-saving state, if the opening time of the electric chew 12D and the normal figure variation time in one auxiliary game are the same, the probability of a hit being determined is high. Since the number of hit determinations per unit time increases, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time becomes longer.

In this way, in the time saving state, it is easier to win than in the non-time saving state, the normal figure fluctuation time is likely to be shorter, and the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game is likely to be longer. By satisfying the three conditions, in the time-saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time becomes longer than in the non-time-saving state, making it easier to win a prize in the second starting port 12. As a result, the so-called "base", which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of fired balls, increases. Therefore, in the time-saving state where the base is high, it is possible to aim for a jackpot win without greatly reducing the number of game balls in possession compared to the normal gaming state. In other words, it can be said that the time-saving state is more advantageous for the player than the non-time-saving state.

Note that in the time saving state, all three conditions for increasing the opening time per unit time of the second starting port 12 may not all be met, but only some of the conditions may be met. Finally, in the time-saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time is longer than in the non-time-saving state, and winning into the second starting port 12 may be facilitated.

In addition, in the time-saving state, the number of executions of the special pattern variable display per unit time is small, or special The average figure fluctuation time may be made low. As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace at which the reserved special drawings are consumed becomes faster, and effective winnings (winnings that can be stored as reserved special drawings) in the starting opening are more likely to occur. Therefore, players can aim for a jackpot while the game progresses smoothly.

In addition, in the following, the first specific gaming state will be referred to as a "high probability high base gaming state" and the second specific gaming state will be referred to as a "high probability low "Base gaming state" and the third specific gaming state are also referred to as "low probability high base gaming state." Furthermore, the normal gaming state is also referred to as a "low probability low base gaming state."

Therefore, the low probability low base gaming state can be said to be a gaming state controlled in a normal probability state and a non-time saving state. Similarly, the low probability high base gaming state is controlled as a normal probability state and a time saving state, the high probability low base gaming state is controlled as a high probability state and a non time saving state, and the high probability high base gaming state is controlled as a high probability state and a time saving state. It can be said that it is a gaming state in which

In this way, the pachinko gaming machine PY can be controlled in a low probability low base gaming state, a low probability high base gaming state, a high probability low base gaming state, a high probability high base gaming state, and a jackpot gaming state. In addition, in the jackpot gaming state, the jackpot gaming state can also be said to be a gaming state advantageous to the player because the jackpot opening 14 is open for a long time and a large amount of game balls can be acquired. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state and the specific gaming state can also be called "advantageous gaming states" that are more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state.

Furthermore, the high probability high base gaming state and the high probability low base gaming state are gaming states that are more advantageous to the player than the low probability low base gaming state in that the jackpot probability is higher than the normal probability state. be. In addition, the high probability high base gaming state and the low probability high base gaming state are more advantageous to the player than the low probability low base gaming state in that the ease of winning the second starting slot 12 is higher than the non-time saving state. It is in a gaming state. Furthermore, in the jackpot game state, the jackpot game state is a low-probability low-base game because the jackpot 14 is opened, where the number of prize balls for one winning is larger than the first starting hole 11 and the second starting hole 12. This is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the current state.

Further, when the power of the pachinko game machine PY is turned on, the normal game state is first set. Further, the jackpot game state is set by the stop display of jackpot symbols. On the other hand, the specific gaming state is set by winning a jackpot and executing a jackpot game. Next, the setting of the specific gaming state will be explained.

3-5. Setting a gaming state upon completion of a jackpot game Pachinko gaming machine PY can set a new gaming state upon completion of a jackpot game. That is, after a jackpot game, the game can be controlled and progressed in a new game state. The duration of this gaming state can be set as appropriate. For example, as a new gaming state, a specific gaming state can be continued until the next jackpot is won. Furthermore, it is also possible to limit the period during which a specific gaming state can continue.

When limiting the duration of a specific gaming state, the specific gaming state can be ended when the termination condition for the duration is satisfied. Then, when the specific gaming state ends, the normal gaming state can be set. Further, regarding the high probability high base gaming state, when the termination condition is satisfied, a low probability high base gaming state or a high probability low base gaming state may be set. In this case, the newly set low probability high base gaming state or high probability low base gaming state may continue until the next jackpot is won. Furthermore, the same or different end conditions may be provided for the newly set low probability high base gaming state or the high probability low base gaming state, and when the end condition is met, the normal gaming state may be set.

Furthermore, the termination conditions for the duration of the specific gaming state can be set as appropriate. As the termination condition, for example, the number of execution times of special figure variable display can be set. In addition, it is not limited to the number of executions of the special figure variable display, but also the elapsed time after the jackpot game, the number of game balls fired after the jackpot game, the number of times the game ball passes through the gate 13 after the jackpot game, or whether to end the specific game state. It is possible to set the termination condition to be the result of terminating the lottery (so-called "fall lottery"). Furthermore, these elements may be set as end conditions singly or in combination.

In addition, these ending conditions may be set the same for all specific gaming states that can be set after a jackpot game, or may be set for some specific gaming states among the specific gaming states that can be set. You may do so. Furthermore, the termination conditions may be different for each specific game state.

Furthermore, the game state controlled after a jackpot game, the presence or absence of an end condition, and the content of the end condition can be associated with the jackpot symbol type related to the jackpot game. For example, when the jackpot symbol type is set as described above, as shown in FIG. The game may be controlled based on the state. Here, this high-probability, high-base game state can be continued until a jackpot is won without setting an end condition. Furthermore, after the jackpot game related to the jackpot symbol C and the jackpot symbol E ends, the game may be controlled in a low probability high base gaming state. Here, an end condition can be set for this low probability high base game state, and the end condition can be set to 100 times of variable display of special symbols. In addition, the relationship between this jackpot type symbol, the specific game state controlled after the jackpot game, the presence or absence of an end condition, and the content of the end condition is an example, and is not limited to this.

In addition, focusing on the gaming profit of a jackpot, a jackpot in which the game progresses with a high probability after a jackpot game is also referred to as a "high probability jackpot." Further, a jackpot in which the game progresses in a high probability state and in a time saving state after a jackpot game is also referred to as a "probable jackpot". In addition, a jackpot in which the game progresses in a normal probability state and a time-saving state after a jackpot game is also referred to as a "time-saving jackpot."

4. Main performances performed by the gaming machine Next, the main performances performed by the pachinko gaming machine PY will be explained using FIGS. 16 to 32.

4-1. Production Mode First, the production mode will be explained. The production mode is a division of production (or a superordinate attribute). The pachinko game machine PY can set a customer waiting performance mode, a normal performance mode, a variable probability performance mode, a time-saving performance mode, and a jackpot performance mode as performance modes.

In the customer waiting production mode, the special figure variable display is performed in the "low probability low base gaming state", "low probability high base gaming state", "high probability low base gaming state" and "high probability high base gaming state". This is a production mode that can be set when there is no special figure variable display and indicates a standby state in which special figure variable display is not performed. A customer waiting performance is performed when a customer waiting performance mode is set. In the customer waiting performance, for example, as shown in FIG. 16(A), a customer waiting demonstration video G100 introducing the pachinko game machine PY is displayed on the display section 50a. Furthermore, when the first performance button 40k is operated while the customer waiting demonstration video G100 is displayed, as shown in FIG. is displayed. Settings related to the effects include volume settings for the sound output from the speaker 52, brightness settings for the display section 50a, and frequency settings for the effects to be performed. Note that setting items related to presentation can be set as appropriate. Further, the setting screen G101 can be made not to be displayed from the customer waiting demonstration video G100 by the player's operation.

The normal production mode is a production mode that can be set in the "low probability low base gaming state" and indicates the normal gaming state. Further, a plurality of lower performance modes belonging to the normal performance mode can be provided. For example, a first normal presentation mode, a second normal presentation mode, a third normal presentation mode, etc. can be provided as presentation modes at a lower level belonging to the normal presentation mode.

In addition, below, the production mode of the lower hierarchy which belongs to production mode is also called "production stage." Accordingly, the first normal presentation mode is also referred to as the "first normal presentation stage," the second normal presentation mode is also referred to as the "second normal presentation stage," and the third normal presentation mode is also referred to as the "third normal presentation stage." say. In addition, unless there are special circumstances, basically the production mode that is set when the special figure variation display starts for the first time after the power of the pachinko game machine PY is turned on is the first normal production stage ( (first normal performance mode). However, the type of production mode that is initially set is not particularly limited and may be changed as appropriate.

In this way, when a plurality of performance stages belonging to the normal performance mode are provided, the performance stages can be repeatedly switched in order when a predetermined switching condition is satisfied. The switching condition can be set as appropriate, but for example, the switching condition can be set to a predetermined number of special symbol variable effects being performed without winning the jackpot. Further, as a switching condition, it can be set that a specific effect, such as a special symbol variation effect based on SP reach/loss variation, is executed.

In addition, as will be described later, a reach may occur in special figure fluctuation effects, but the special figure variation effect is the entire section of the special figure variation effect when a reach does not occur, and a reach is established when a reach occurs. It can be divided into the first stage before the reach occurs, and the second stage after the reach is established in the case where a reach occurs. Note that the first part consists of the above-mentioned "normal fluctuation".

In the first stage of the first normal presentation stage, a background image (FIG. 17A: first normal background image G111) mainly representing a city view is displayed on the display section 50a. In the first stage of the second normal performance stage, a background image mainly representing the field of a baseball field (FIG. 17(B): second normal background image G112) is displayed on the display section 50a. In the first stage of the third normal performance stage, a background image mainly representing the inside of the restaurant (FIG. 17(C): third normal background image G113) is displayed on the display section 50a. On the other hand, in the latter part of the first to third normal performance stages, the first normal background image G111, the second normal background image G112, and the third normal background image G113 are not displayed. A special background image will be displayed depending on the type of reach.

Note that the dedicated background image according to the type of reach in the normal production mode may be a common background image in the normal production mode regardless of the type of production stage, or may be a different background image for each production stage.

Further, the normal performance mode may be set even in the "high probability low base game state", and the normal performance mode may be a performance mode indicating a non-time saving state. Alternatively, a predetermined performance mode that is set only in the "high probability low base game state" and is different from the normal performance mode may be provided. Further, a predetermined performance mode different from the normal performance mode may be set in a low probability low base game state and a high probability low base game state that occur under certain conditions.

The variable probability production mode is a production mode that can be set in the "high probability high base gaming state" and indicates the high probability high base gaming state. In the first stage of the probability variation production mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 17(D), a background image representing the universe (probability variation background image G120) is displayed on the display unit 50a, and probability variation BGM is output from the speaker 52. . In addition, in the latter part of the variable probability performance mode, a dedicated background image corresponding to the type of reach in the variable probability performance mode is displayed.

The time-saving production mode can be set in the "low-probability, high-base gaming state" or "high-probability, high-base gaming state," and is either the low-probability, high-base gaming state or the high-probability, high-base gaming state; This is a production mode that indicates the state. In the first stage of the time-saving production mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 17(E), a background image representing the sky (time-saving background image G130) is displayed on the display unit 50a, and time-saving BGM is output from the speaker 52. . In addition, in the latter part of the time-saving production mode, a dedicated background image is displayed according to the type of reach in the time-saving production mode.

In addition, the time-saving performance mode can be set only in the low probability high base gaming state, and can also be set as a performance mode indicating the low probability high base gaming state.

In addition, for either or both of the fixed variable production mode and the time-saving production mode, in the same way as the normal production mode, a plurality of production stages for the production mode are provided, and when a predetermined switching condition is met, the production stage is switched. You can also do it.

The jackpot production mode is a production mode that can be set when a jackpot game is being played in the "jackpot game state", and is a production mode that indicates that a jackpot game is being played. In the jackpot performance mode, for example, during the opening of a jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 18(A), an opening image G1 that suggests the start of a jackpot game or a right-hand hit image G2 that encourages "right-hand hitting" is displayed on the display section 50a. A jackpot opening performance will be held where the will be displayed. In addition, during the opening, as a jackpot opening effect, a background image (opening background image G200) corresponding to the type of jackpot game is displayed on the display section 50a in the background of the opening image G1 and the right-handed image G2. .

In addition, in the jackpot production mode, during the round game in the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 18(B), the right-handed image G2 is continuously displayed from the opening on the display section 50a, and the round image indicating the number of rounds is displayed on the display section 50a. A round effect is performed in which G3 and a prize ball number image G4 indicating the number of paid out prize balls are displayed. In addition, during a round game, as a round effect, a background image (round background) corresponding to the type of jackpot game is displayed on the display section 50a as a background of the right-handed hit image G2, the round image G3, and the prize ball number image G4. Image G201) is displayed, and BGM corresponding to the type of jackpot game is output from the speaker 52.

Furthermore, during the ending of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 18(C), the display section 50a displays an ending image G5 that suggests the production mode to be set after the jackpot game and the total number of prize balls that have been paid out. A jackpot ending effect is performed in which the total prize ball count image G6 is displayed. In addition, during the ending, as a jackpot ending effect, a background image (ending background image G202) corresponding to the type of jackpot game is displayed on the display section 50a in the background of the ending image G5 and the total prize ball count image G6. be done.

In addition, hereinafter, the jackpot opening performance, the round performance, and the jackpot ending performance are collectively referred to as the "jackpot game performance" as the performance executed in the jackpot game. That is, a jackpot game performance is performed in the jackpot performance mode.

4-2. Special figure variation effect Next, the special figure variation effect will be explained. When the variable display of the special pattern starts, the pachinko gaming machine PY displays the special pattern variation pattern related to the variable display of the special pattern and the special pattern lottery result (jackpot determination result, jackpot symbol type determination result, reach determination result, A special figure variation effect is executed based on the special figure variation pattern determination result).

In the special symbol variation performance, a variation display of performance symbols is performed on the display unit 50a in a manner superimposed on a predetermined background image. In the fluctuating display of performance symbols, the performance symbols change and then stop. That is, after the special symbol fluctuation time and the variable display of the performance symbols are performed, the fluctuations are stopped and the static display of the performance symbols is performed. Then, basically, the result of the special drawing lottery is notified by the stop display of the performance symbols.

It should be noted that in the special symbol variation performance performed on the display section 50a, it is also possible to use images other than the variation display of production symbols. Furthermore, in addition to the image display device 50 including the display section 50a, a special feature using various presentation devices such as a speaker 52, a frame lamp 53, a board moving device 55, a first presentation button device 40, and a second presentation button device 41 is used. It is possible to perform figure fluctuation effects.

Next, the effect patterns displayed on the display section 50a in the special figure variable effect executed in response to the special figure variable display will be explained. The production pattern is also identification information for indicating the special drawing lottery result, and multiple types are provided. Specifically, one of the constituent elements of the effect pattern constitutes identification information for indicating the special drawing lottery result, and a plurality of types of effect patterns are provided depending on the difference in the identification information.

For example, as shown in FIG. 19(A), the effect patterns can be composed of numbers 1 to 9, and nine effect patterns can be provided. Then, a performance pattern including the number "1" is defined as a performance pattern G10a. Similarly, the performance symbols including numbers "2" to "9" are designated as performance symbols G10b to G10e. For convenience, when the individual performance symbols are handled without distinction, they are collectively referred to as "performance symbol G10."

In addition, the numerical parts of the production patterns G10c and G10g related to "3" and "7" are red, and "1", "2", "4", "5", "6", "8", and The numerical parts of the production patterns G10a, G10b, G10d, G10e, G10f, G10h, and G10i of "9" are blue. That is, colors are included in the constituent elements of the effect pattern G10. Note that the configuration of the performance symbol G10 and what the identification information is set to may be changed as appropriate. For example, other components such as characters associated with each number may be added to the production pattern G10.

Next, the effect pattern display area for displaying the effect pattern G10 will be explained. For example, as shown in FIG. 19(B), the display section 50a is divided into three parts approximately equally in the horizontal direction, and the left, center, and right sides are divided into a left presentation pattern area 50b1, a middle presentation pattern area 50b2, and a right presentation pattern. This can be the area 50b3. The performance pattern G10 is displayed in any of the left performance pattern area 50b1, the middle performance pattern area 50b2, and the right performance pattern area 50b3.

Mainly, in the first part of the special symbol variation performance, the performance pattern G10 displayed in the left performance pattern area 50b1 is collectively referred to as "left performance pattern EZ1", and the performance pattern G10 displayed in the middle performance pattern area 50b2 is collectively referred to as "left performance pattern EZ1". They are collectively referred to as "middle performance symbols EZ2," and the performance symbols G10 displayed in the right performance symbol area 50b3 are collectively referred to as "right performance symbols EZ3." That is, in the left performance pattern area 50b1, middle performance pattern area 50b2, and right performance pattern area 50b3, the performance pattern G10 consisting of numbers 1 to 9 is displayed in common, but the performance pattern G10 consisting of the numbers 1 to 9 is displayed in the relative display position. When distinguishing G10, it is written as a left performance pattern EZ1, a middle performance pattern EZ2, and a right performance pattern EZ3.

In addition, as described later, in the special pattern variation performance, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are displayed in a variable manner, but ultimately the special symbol lottery results (jackpot determination result, jackpot symbol type, reach determination result) are shown. The stop display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed in this manner. When announcing a jackpot as a result of the special drawing lottery, performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed so that three performance symbols G10 of the same number are lined up side by side (so-called "Zero"). Therefore, hereinafter, the effect pattern G10 consisting of the same numbers forming the effect patterns EZ1 to EZ3 that are stopped and displayed when notifying a jackpot will be referred to as a "jackpot effect pattern." For example, if the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are displayed as "7, 7, 7," the jackpot design will be "performance symbol G10g," and if they are statically displayed as "9, 9, 9," the jackpot design will be " The production pattern is G10i. Furthermore, the jackpot effect symbols may be abbreviated by numbers included in the effect symbols. For example, if the jackpot effect pattern is "performance pattern G10g", the jackpot effect pattern will be "7", and if the jackpot effect pattern is "performance pattern G10i", the jackpot effect pattern will be "9". Furthermore, as will be described later, in the special symbol variation performance, the special symbol lottery result is completely displayed when the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are definitively stopped and displayed. However, basically, in the middle of the special symbol variation performance, before the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are definitively stopped and displayed, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed (temporary stop display). This is because the contents of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that have been temporarily stopped and displayed may be changed. For example, after the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a mode indicating a jackpot (relatively disadvantageous to the player), they are changed to a mode indicating another jackpot (relatively advantageous to the player). may be done. Therefore, when the performance patterns EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner that first indicates a jackpot (before they are changed), the performance pattern G10 consisting of the same numbers that constitute the performance patterns EZ1 to EZ3. It is also referred to as a ``jackpot effect pattern''.

In addition, in the special pattern variation production, the variation display of production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, but in the middle of the variation display of production symbols EZ1 to EZ3, the left production symbol EZ1 and the right production symbol EZ3 are the production symbol G10 with the same number. Reach may be temporarily stopped (temporary stop display). As will be described later, reach is an effect that suggests that there is a possibility of a jackpot gaming state, and by reaching reach, the chance of winning a jackpot has increased. Therefore, the performance pattern G10 consisting of the same numbers forming the left performance pattern EZ1 and the right performance pattern EZ3 related to the reach is referred to as a "reach performance pattern". For example, when the left production symbol EZ1 and the right production symbol EZ3 temporarily stop display at the production symbol G10a of “1”, the reach production symbol becomes “production symbol G10a”, and when they temporarily stop display at the production symbol G10a of “3” , the reach effect pattern becomes “effect pattern G10c”. Furthermore, the reach effect design may be abbreviated by the number included in the effect pattern. For example, if the ready-to-win performance symbol is "performance symbol G10a", the ready-to-win performance symbol is abbreviated as "1", and if the ready-to-win performance symbol is "performance symbol G10c", the ready-to-reach performance symbol is abbreviated as "3".

Further, as shown in FIG. 19(B), it is possible to provide a small pattern area 50c in which small patterns are variably displayed in one section of the left end (lower left corner) of the lower end of the display section 50a. In the small symbol area 50c, small symbols can be variably displayed in accordance with the variable display of the special symbol. Although the design of the small symbol can be set as appropriate, for example, the number part of the performance symbol G10 may be reduced as it is.

In addition, in FIG. 19(B), the left presentation pattern area 50b1, the middle presentation pattern area 50b2, the right presentation pattern area 50b3, and the small pattern area 50c are clearly indicated by dashed lines, but these are the left presentation pattern area 50b1, These are described to represent the ranges of the middle effect symbol area 50b2, right effect symbol area 50b3, and small symbol area 50c, and are not actually displayed.

Furthermore, as described above, the performances that constitute the performance flow of the special figure variation performance include normal variation, N reach, L reach, SP reach, and battle performance. Some of these will now be explained.

4-2-1. Normal variation Pachinko gaming machine PY is capable of first performing normal variation in the special figure variation performance. The normal variation functions as an effect that suggests that the variable display of the special figure has started. Next, normal fluctuations will be specifically explained. As small symbols, a left small symbol KZ1, a medium small symbol KZ2, and a right small symbol KZ3 corresponding to the left performance symbol EZ1, middle performance symbol EZ2, and right performance symbol EZ3 are variably displayed in the small symbol area 50c.

For example, as shown in FIG. 20(A), on the display section 50a, the left effect pattern EZ1, the medium effect pattern EZ2, and the right effect pattern EZ3 are stopped and displayed, and the left small pattern KZ1, the medium small pattern KZ2, and the right small pattern When the variable display of the special pattern starts from the state where the symbol KZ3 is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the special pattern is not performed, and the variable display of the special pattern is started, the variable display of the special pattern starts as shown in FIG. 20(B) As shown in the figure, the special figure variation effect is started along with the start. Specifically, the variable display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is started, and the variable display of the left small symbol KZ1, the medium and small symbols KZ2, and the right small symbol KZ3 is started.

The display mode of the variable display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the display mode of the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 can be made different. For example, the variable display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed by scrolling each production symbol EZ1 to EZ3 from the top to the bottom of the display section 50a, and the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is performed by scrolling each of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 from the top to the bottom of the display section 50a. It is also possible to change the positions one after another at a fixed position. Note that the display mode of the variable display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the display mode of the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 may be the same.

In addition, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are displayed in a variable manner at high speed immediately after the start of the variable display. While the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are being displayed in a high-speed variable manner, the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are basically images on the background side thereof, such as background images G111 to G114. is displayed with transparency for easy viewing.

Then, if the special pattern variation pattern of the variable display of this special pattern is a special pattern variation pattern with no reach and no loss (for example, normal loss variation), the variable display of the special pattern ends (special pattern (stop display), the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed at the loss eyes (so-called "rose eyes") that are unique to no-reach losses.

Towards the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, for example, first, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 20(D), the right effect symbol EZ3 temporarily stops (temporarily stops) at approximately the center position in the vertical direction, and furthermore, as shown in FIG. Temporarily stops (temporary stop) at the center position.

Finally, the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3, which are temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) in a horizontally lined state at approximately the vertical center position, are completely stopped all at once as shown in FIG. 20(F). , and the stop is confirmed (the stop display of production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed). When the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3, which have been temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped), come to a complete stop, that is, when the final stop display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, the three small symbols KZ1 to EZ3 KZ3 stops all at once at the same random number as the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3, and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are also stopped and displayed.

In addition, when we say that the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 temporarily stop, we mean that the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 do not move greatly as in a scroll display, but rather shake slightly or make small reciprocating motions on the spot. say. Therefore, strictly speaking, the state in which the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed is different from the state in which the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are definitively stopped and displayed, but this provisional stop display and A definitive stop display is sometimes referred to as a "stop display" in a broad sense. In addition, in the example of FIG. 20, when the stop display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, the performance symbols are stopped in the order of left performance symbol EZ1 → right performance symbol EZ3 → middle performance symbol EZ2, but the order of stopping ( The method) is not limited to this and can be set as appropriate.

4-2-2. Reach Next, we will explain how reach is established. Even if the special figure variation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is a special figure variation pattern with reach and loss (for example, N loss variation), basically the same as the case without reach described above, on the display section 50a, As shown in FIG. 21(A), the variable display of the special symbols starts from a state where the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are definitely stopped and displayed, and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed, As shown in FIG. 21(B), the variable display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 starts, and at the same time, the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 starts.

After that, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. As shown in 21(D), the right effect symbols EZ3 related to the same number "5" are temporarily stopped (temporary stop) in line in the horizontal direction at approximately the center position in the vertical direction, and a reach is established. When a reach is achieved, an image G11 indicating that a reach is achieved (a reach suggesting image) is displayed. Incidentally, even if the reach is achieved with the left performance symbol EZ1 and the right performance symbol EZ3, the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 continues to be performed.

Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 21, when the reach is established, the production symbols are temporarily stopped (temporary stop) in the order of left production symbol EZ1 → right production symbol EZ3, but the order (method) of temporary stopping is as follows. It is not limited to , and can be set as appropriate. Furthermore, the numbers of the production symbols that constitute the reach are not limited to "5" either. Further, the position where the vehicle is temporarily stopped (temporary stop) is not limited to the substantially central position in the vertical direction. Further, the direction in which the effect symbols forming the reach are lined up is not limited to the horizontal direction, but may be in other directions such as a diagonal direction.

In this way, the entire period of the special symbol variation performance when there is no reach and a loss, and the section from the start of the special symbol variation performance when the reach occurs to the time when the reach is established can be made into normal variation. However, the time until the reach is established can be appropriately set based on the special symbol fluctuation pattern and the like. Furthermore, it is also possible to perform various preview performances such as a so-called "pseudo series", a cut-in preview, and a dialogue preview until the reach is established. Alternatively, it is also possible to enter the so-called "zone" before the reach is established.

4-2-3. N-Reach Pachinko gaming machine PY is capable of performing N-Reach when a reach is established after a normal fluctuation. N reach is a performance that suggests that the lottery result of the special drawing lottery may have been a "big hit", and functions as a performance to make the player expect a big win. Next, N reach will be specifically explained.

When reach is established, for example, as shown in FIG. 21(D), N reach is performed from that point on. In N reach, as shown in FIG. 22(A), the state when reach is established is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). When the N reach is started, as shown in FIG. 22(B), the medium effect pattern EZ2, which is fluctuatingly displayed (scrolling) at high speed in the normal mode, gradually slows down.

If the special pattern variation pattern of the variable display of the special pattern is a special pattern variation pattern with reach and loss (for example, N loss variation), from the state where reach is established, the middle production pattern EZ2 will temporarily be at approximately the center position in the vertical direction. The game stops (temporarily stops), and a stop display of the production pattern indicating a loss is performed. At this time, reach has been established, so as shown in Figure 22 (C-1), a medium effect symbol consisting of a number ("4" in Figure 22 (C-1)) different from the numbers that constitute the reach EZ2 temporarily stops. Then, with the end of the variable display of the special figure (stop display of the special figure), the temporary stop state becomes a complete stop state, as shown in FIG. The left effect pattern EZ1, the middle effect pattern EZ2, and the right effect pattern EZ3 are stopped and displayed.

In addition, when the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 that have been temporarily stopped (temporary stop) completely stop at a loss that is unique to a loss with a reach, that is, when the stop display of the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, 3 The three small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 stop all at once at the same loss points as the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3, which are unique to a reach loss, and the stop display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is also performed. Note that the contents of N reach can be changed or added as appropriate.

If the special symbol fluctuation performance does not end at N reach, as shown in Figure 22 (C-2), the remaining one medium performance symbol EZ2 that has not stopped while the reach is maintained will fluctuate at high speed again, and the figure As shown in 22 (D-2), N reach may develop (switch) to L reach or SP reach through whiteout, which indicates development in production.

4-2-4. L Reach Pachinko gaming machine PY can perform L Reach after N Reach. The L reach is a performance that suggests that the possibility that the result of the special drawing lottery will be a "big hit" is higher than the N reach, and functions as a performance to make the player expect a jackpot. Note that even in the case of L reach, the established reach is maintained, but for example, as shown in FIG. It moves to a predetermined position that does not overlap with the small symbol area 50c in the section 50a (for example, the left presentation symbol EZ1 is at the upper left of the display section 50a, and the right presentation symbol EZ3 is at the upper right of the display section 50a).

Moreover, at the start of L reach, for example, as shown in FIG. 23(A), a background image exclusively for L reach (background image for L reach G114) is displayed on the display unit 50a. The L reach background image G114 is composed of a moving image in which a predetermined Thule develops. The content of the story of the video related to the L reach background image G114 can be set as appropriate, but in the basic embodiment, the content is such that the main character confesses his feelings to a girl.

When the L reach background image G114 is displayed, the scene starts with the main character waiting for a girl at a meeting place, as shown in FIG. 23(A). Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 23(B), a girl appears at the meeting place. At this time, at approximately the center of the display section 50a, a production symbol with the number "5" that constitutes the reach and a production symbol with the number "4" that does not constitute the reach appear as the medium production symbol EZ2. It rotates slowly, coming out from the back side to the front side, and then returning to the back side.

While the rotation of the number "4" production symbol and the number "5" production symbol continues, Thule related to the L reach background image G114 progresses. Then, as shown in FIG. 23(C), a scene appears in which the main character confesses his feelings to the girl. At this time, at approximately the center of the display section 50a, the effect pattern with the number "5" that makes up the reach and the effect pattern with the number "4" that does not make up the reach seem to mutually repel the opponent. collide with each other. The number "5" production symbol constitutes a reach, and the number "4" production symbol does not constitute a reach, so the number "4" production symbol is blown away and the number "5" production symbol is If it remains, the stop display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is established in a manner that indicates a jackpot, while if the production symbol with the number "5" is blown away and the production symbol with the number "4" remains, the production is in a manner that indicates a loss in reach. The stop display of symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is established. Therefore, the scene in FIG. 23(C) is the final phase of the L reach, and a performance suggesting a jackpot (jackpot suggestion performance) is executed or a performance suggesting a loss (loss suggestion performance) is executed. This constitutes a branching point (a so-called "win/lose branching point").

At the winning/losing point, if the special pattern variation pattern of the variable display of the special symbol is a jackpot variation (L jackpot variation), a smiling girl will appear close-up on the display section 50a, as shown in FIG. 24 (A-1). After this is displayed, as shown in FIG. 24 (B-1), the main character who is happy after successfully confessing is displayed, and a predetermined sound effect is output from the speaker 52. At this time, along with the left performance symbol EZ1 and right performance symbol EZ3 of the number "5" that constitute the reach, the middle performance symbol EZ2 of the number "5" that constitutes the reach is temporarily stopped at the center of the display section 50a. displayed in the following manner. That is, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a jackpot.

The display of the main character happy after successfully confessing and the output of a predetermined sound effect constitute a jackpot suggestion production. After the jackpot suggesting performance, as shown in FIG. 24 (C-1), the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a jackpot.

On the other hand, after the winning/losing point, if the special symbol variation pattern of the variable display of the special symbol is a loss variation with reach (L loss variation), the jackpot suggestion effect is not performed and the figure is displayed in the L reach background image G114. As shown in FIG. 24 (A-2), a close-up of a girl with a sad expression is displayed on the display section 50a, and then, as shown in FIG. 24 (B-2), she is disappointed because she failed to confess. The main character is displayed. At this time, along with the left performance symbol EZ1 and right performance symbol EZ3 of the number "5" that constitute the reach, the middle performance symbol EZ2 of the number "5" that does not constitute the reach is temporarily stopped at the center of the display section 50a. is displayed. That is, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating that the reach is out of reach.

The display of the main character being disappointed after failing to confess constitutes a presentation that suggests failure. After the loss suggestion performance, as shown in FIG. 24 (C-2), the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed in the losing position for reach.

4-2-5. SP Reach Also, the pachinko gaming machine PY is capable of performing SP Reach after N Reach. The SP reach is a performance that suggests that the possibility that the result of the special drawing lottery will be a "big hit" is higher than the L reach, and functions as a performance to make the player expect a jackpot. Note that even in SP reach, the established reach is maintained, but for example, as shown in FIG. It moves to a predetermined position that does not overlap with the small symbol area 50c in the section 50a (for example, the left presentation symbol EZ1 is at the upper left of the display section 50a, and the right presentation symbol EZ3 is at the upper right of the display section 50a).

Furthermore, at the start of SP reach, for example, as shown in FIG. 25(A), a background image exclusively for SP reach (SP reach background image G115) is displayed on the display unit 50a. The SP reach background image G115 is composed of a moving image in which a predetermined Thule develops. The content of the story of the video related to the SP reach background image G115 can be set as appropriate, but in the basic embodiment, the story consists of a confrontation between the main character and an enemy character who is a rival of the main character. ing. Note that the main character is a baseball pitcher, the enemy character is a baseball batter, and the two face off in the positions of a pitcher and a batter in a baseball game.

When the SP reach background image G115 is displayed, an enemy character first appears as shown in FIG. 25(A), and then an enemy character appears in the center of the display section 50a as shown in FIG. 25(B). An image (SP reach start title image) G11 indicating that SP reach has started is displayed. The SP reach start title image G11 is composed of a title image G11a representing the title of the SP reach "In FIG. Ru.

Next, as shown in FIG. 25(C), a scene in which the main character and the enemy character are facing each other is displayed. After that, in the SP reach background image G115, as shown in FIG. 26(A), the main character throws a ball, and as shown in FIG. 26(B), the ball advances toward the enemy character, and as shown in FIG. As shown in C), the enemy character starts swinging the bat. Next, as shown in FIG. 26(D), the ball and the bat approach each other, and a scene is reached in which the confrontation between the protagonist character and the enemy character is about to come to an end. This scene constitutes a turning point (win-lose turning point) in the confrontation between the pitcher and the batter, where the main character wins, suggesting a jackpot, or loses, suggesting a loss.

After this winning/losing point, if the special pattern variation pattern of the variable display of the special symbol is a jackpot variation (SP jackpot variation), as shown in FIG. After winning the battle, as shown in FIG. 27 (B-1), the main character strikes out the enemy character and screams on the mound, and a predetermined sound effect is output from the speaker 52. be done. At this time, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a jackpot.

The display of the main character shouting after winning the battle and the output of a predetermined sound effect constitute a jackpot suggestion performance. After the jackpot suggesting performance, as shown in FIG. 27 (C-1), the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a jackpot.

On the other hand, after the winning/losing point, if the special symbol variation pattern of the variable display of the special symbol is a reach loss variation (SP loss variation), the jackpot suggestion effect is not performed and the SP reach background image G115 is displayed as shown in FIG. 27 ( As shown in A-2), the enemy character hits a home run and loses the match, and as shown in FIG. 27 (B-2), the main character is disappointed on the mound. At this time, the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a reach loss.

The display of the main character being disappointed after losing the battle constitutes a presentation suggesting a loss. After the loss suggestion performance, as shown in FIG. 27 (C-2), the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed in the losing eye for reach.

Next, the movable object performance and operation performance performed in the special figure variation performance will be explained. The movable body performance and operation performance may be performed as part of the above-mentioned SP reach, L reach, N reach, or jackpot game performance, etc., or may be performed independently of these performances. Sometimes it is done. First, I will explain the moving object performance.

4-3. Movable Body Performance The pachinko game machine PY is capable of performing a movable body performance that involves the movement of a movable body at a predetermined timing in a predetermined performance such as a special figure variation performance or a jackpot game performance. The movable object performance is a performance using a movable device such as the board movable device 55, and functions as a performance that suggests the degree of expectation of a jackpot or development to SP reach.

For example, when the movable object effect functions as an effect that suggests the development to SP reach, as shown in Fig. 28 (A), when developing from N reach to SP reach in the special figure variation effect, first As shown in (B), the plate movable device 55 is activated, and the plate movable body 55k is lowered to the operating position when viewed from the front, and is held at that position for a predetermined period of time. Furthermore, at this time, an effect image G13 associated with the operation of the movable board 55k is also displayed on the entire display section 50a. Then, as shown in FIG. 28(C), the effect image G13 is erased, the board movable body 55k rises to the standby position, and the board movable device 55 returns to the normal standby state. When the board moving device 55 returns to the normal standby state, it develops into SP reach. Note that the operation details of the movable device in the movable body performance can be changed or added as appropriate.

4-4. Operation Performance Next, the operation performance will be explained. The pachinko game machine PY performs an operation promotion performance at a predetermined timing in a predetermined performance such as a special figure fluctuation performance or a jackpot game performance, and an operation result performance according to the operation of the first performance button 40k, the second performance button 41k, etc. It is possible to perform operations including. The operation promotion performance is a performance that encourages the player to operate the operation means, and the operation result performance is a performance that is performed in response to the operation of the operation means in the operation promotion performance, and each is a performance to make the player expect a jackpot. It functions as a performance.

For example, as mentioned above, when a winning or losing point is reached in L reach or SP reach, a period (operation valid period) occurs during which the pressing operation of the first production button 40k is valid, and along with the occurrence of this operation valid period, , as shown in FIG. 29(A), a performance (operation promotion performance) that prompts the user to operate the first performance button 40k is performed.

In the operation promotion performance, a first performance button operation promotion performance image G12 is displayed on the display section 50a. The first performance button operation promotion performance image G12 includes an image (operation target image) G12a representing the first performance button 40k to be operated, and an image (pressing An image (operation image) G12b representing the remaining time of the operation valid period (operation valid period) related to the operation of the first effect button 40k (operation valid period remaining time image) G12c.

Note that the operation valid period remaining time image G12c is composed of a generally curved progress bar, and changes as time passes so that the player can easily understand the remaining time of the operation valid period. Note that FIG. 29(B) shows a state in which the operation valid period has occurred and 1/3 of the operation valid time has elapsed.

Then, when the special pattern variation pattern of the variable display of the special pattern is a jackpot variation (SP jackpot variation), after the first production button 40k is pressed during the operation validity period, or after the first production button 40k is pressed during the operation validity period, After the remaining time of the valid operation period runs out without 40k being operated, the operation result presentation is performed.

As shown in FIG. 29(C), for example, as shown in FIG. 29(C), the operation result is that the panel movable device 55 is operated, the panel movable body 55k is lowered to the operating position, is held at that position for a predetermined time, and the rotating member 55k1 is lowered. rotates for a predetermined time. In this way, the operation result presentation also includes the movable object presentation. Furthermore, at this time, an effect image G13 accompanying the movement of the board movable body 55k is displayed on the entire display section 50a as an operation result effect. Then, as shown in FIG. 29(D), the effect image G13 is erased, the rotation of the rotating member 55k1 is stopped, and the movable board 55k is raised, thereby ending the operation result presentation. When the operation result presentation is completed, a jackpot suggestion presentation is performed.

On the other hand, if the special symbol variation pattern of the variable display of the special symbol is reach loss variation (SP loss variation), even if the first production button 40k is pressed during the operation validity period, or the first production button 40k is pressed. Even if the remaining time of the performance button operation validity period runs out without being executed, the operation result performance is not performed and the loss suggesting performance is performed.

Note that the operation result presentation is not limited to the operation of the board moving device 55 or the display of the effect image G13, but can be changed or added as appropriate. Further, the operation performance is not limited to the special symbol variation performance, but can also be executed in the jackpot performance.

4-5. Pre-reading effect Next, a pre-reading effect that can be executed before the special figure variable display subject to special figure reservation is executed will be explained. The pachinko gaming machine PY is capable of performing a look-ahead effect for the special figure 1 hold or special figure 2 hold for which no jackpot judgment has been made, based on the result of the look-ahead judgment, at any timing of the special figure fluctuation effect. . The pre-read performance is a performance that suggests the degree of expectation of a jackpot for the special figure 1 reservation or the special figure 2 reservation, and functions as a performance that makes the player expect a jackpot even before the variable display of the special figure corresponding to the reservation. As an example of a look-ahead performance, there is a reservation change notice using a reservation performance that represents special map reservation. Here, the pending performance and pending change notice performed in the normal performance mode will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 30(A), the hold effect is performed in a hold display area 50d formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in a section in the substantially center of the lower end of the display section 50a. The hold display area 50d is composed of a first area 50d1, a second area 50d2, a third area 50d3, and a fourth area 50d4, which are obtained by dividing the hold display area 50d into four substantially equally in the left and right direction. That is, in the hold display area 50d, the first area 50d1 to the fourth area 50d4 are arranged in order from the left end to the right end.

In the first area 50d1, the first variable display of special figure 1 is displayed based on the special figure 1 related random number that occurs first among the reserved special figure 1 reserves and corresponds to the special figure 1 reserve. A hold icon representing special figure 1 hold is displayed. Similarly, in the second area 50d2 to fourth area 50d4, the second to fourth reserved special figure 1 reservations are generated based on the special figure 1 related random numbers corresponding to the special figure 1 reservations. A hold icon representing special figure 1 hold, in which special figure 1 variable display is performed, is displayed second to fourth.

In addition, below, the special figure 1 reservation corresponding to the reservation icon displayed in 1st area|region 50d1 is called "special figure 1 reservation of reservation order 1." Similarly, the special figure 1 reservation corresponding to the reservation icons displayed in the second area 50d2, third area 50d3, and fourth area 50d4 is referred to as "special figure 1 reservation in reservation order 2" and "special figure 1 reservation in reservation order 3." "Special figure 1 reservation" and "Special figure 1 reservation of reservation order 4". That is, the existing special drawing 1 reservations are referred to as "reservation order 1" to "reservation order 4" in the order in which they occur.

Moreover, the display area 50e is formed to the left of the hold display area 50d. In the display area 50e, the icon representing the special figure 1 variable display currently being executed is displayed. Therefore, the object indicated by the icon displayed in the display area 50e is different from the object indicated by the hold icon displayed in the hold display area 50d, and strictly speaking, the "hold effect" corresponding to special drawing 1 hold is Although not included, since the display of the hold icon and the display of the icon are related, hereinafter, the display of the hold icon and the display of the icon will be collectively referred to as "hold effect". Further, the hold icon and the icon are collectively referred to as an "icon." Furthermore, the special figure 1 variation display being executed that the icon indicates is also referred to as "the variation".

In addition, in FIG. 30(A), the hold display area 50d and the display area 50e are clearly indicated by dashed lines, and the first area 50d1 to the fourth area 50d4 are clearly shown by broken lines; This is written to represent the range of the first area 50d1 to the fourth area 50d4 and the display area 50e, and is not actually displayed.

Next, a specific example of the hold effect will be explained. In the following explanation, variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 will be omitted. As a premise, it is assumed that the special figure 1 variable display is in progress (the special figure variable effect is in progress) and the number of special figure 1 reservations (U1) is "2". Under this situation, as shown in FIG. 30(B), in the aforementioned first area 50d1 (not shown), the special figure 1 hold that occurred first among the currently held special figure 1 hold (order of hold) A reservation icon HA2 representing a special figure 1 reservation (reservation order 2) is displayed, and in the aforementioned second area 50d2 (not shown), a reservation icon HA2 representing a special figure 1 reservation (reservation order 2 A hold icon HA3 representing special figure 1 hold) is displayed. Further, in the aforementioned display area 50e (not shown), the icon HA1 representing the currently executed special figure 1 variable display is displayed. Note that the display mode of the icons HA1 to HA3 displayed in FIG. 30(B) is the normal mode.

In this manner, in the hold performance, special drawings 1 are displayed in order of occurrence from the left end to the right of the hold display area 50d. That is, the variable display of reserved special symbols, in other words, the variable display of unexecuted special symbols based on the special symbol related determination information stored in the special symbol reservation storage unit 105, is individually displayed with a reservation icon. Ru.

Then, as shown in FIG. 30(C), when the stop display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, the icon HA1, which had been representing the special symbol variation display being executed until immediately before, is erased. Continuously, when variable display of special symbols (special figure variation effect) is started based on the special figure 1 hold representing the hold icon HA2, the hold icon HA2 and the hold icon HA3 are shifted. Specifically, the hold icon HA2 displayed in the first area 50d1 (not shown) moves to the display area 50e (not shown), and the hold icon HA3 displayed in the second area 50d2 (not shown) moves to the corresponding display area 50e (not shown). to the first area 50d1. That is, the displayed hold icon HA2 and hold icon HA3 are each shifted one by one to the left. This means that the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the hold icon HA2 is started, and the special figure 1 hold that the hold icon HA3 represents is the special figure 1 hold that occurred first among the currently held special figure 1 hold. This is to adapt the hold icon HA2 and the hold icon HA3 to the situation in response to the special figure variable display being started next.

Further, the pending icon HA2 displayed in the display area 50e represents the special figure 1 variable display being executed, so it becomes the icon HA2 when displayed in the display area 50e. That is, the word "icon" is prefixed to "pending" for the icon displayed in the pending display area 50d, and "relevant" for the icon displayed in the display area 50e. In other words, when the hold icon is displayed, if the start condition for the special symbol fluctuation display is satisfied for the special symbol reservation indicated by the hold icon, the special symbol fluctuation display related to the establishment of the start condition is A corresponding hold icon is displayed as the icon.

In addition, when changing from a hold icon to the relevant icon, in other words, when moving the icon from the hold display area 50d to the relevant display area 50e, the size of the icon may remain the same or may be enlarged. In FIG. 30(C), the icon is enlarged approximately twice when moving from the reserved display area 50d to the display area 50e.

Then, from this situation, when a game ball enters the first starting port 11 and a special drawing 1 reservation occurs, a new reservation is made according to the occurrence of the special symbol 1 reservation, as shown in FIG. 30(E). Icon HA4 is displayed in the aforementioned second area 50d2 (not shown).

In this way, when a prize is won in the first starting slot 11 and a special drawing 1 related random number is acquired, one common icon is displayed. This icon will disappear when the special figure 1 variable display based on the winning prize ends, but while it is displayed, it will remain in the state in which the special figure 1 variable display is placed (on hold and in progress). Depending on the icon, the icon exists under different names (pending icon and the icon).

By the way, as mentioned above, the start winning command includes win/fail information and special figure fluctuation pattern information. Then, the pachinko game machine PY can display the hold icon in a normal mode or a special mode based on this validity information and special symbol variation pattern information. Displaying this hold icon in a special manner is called a "hold notice."

When the display mode of the pending icon is a special mode, that is, when a pending notice is given, the player can expect that he may win a jackpot with the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the pending icon. Next, a specific example of the suspension notice will be explained. As a specific example of the suspension notice, assume that the display mode of the suspension icon HA4 shown in FIG. 30(E) becomes a special mode.

One type of reservation notice is a reservation notice that enters a special mode immediately after the reservation icon is displayed, in other words, a reservation notice is given when special drawing 1 reservation occurs (at the time of winning at the first starting gate 11). There are types. For example, as shown in FIG. 31(A), from the situation before the hold icon HA4 is displayed (the situation in FIG. 30(D)), a game ball enters the first starting port 11, and the special figure 1 is put on hold. When this occurs, similarly to the case of FIG. 30(E), in response to the occurrence of the special drawing 1 holding, the holding icon HA4 in the normal mode is displayed in the aforementioned second area 50d2 (not shown). In addition, in the drawing, the hold icon in the normal mode appears to be completely stationary, but in reality, even if you try to make it completely stationary, the display position does not move, but the It may also be configured so that it sways slightly in the field.

Immediately thereafter, as shown in FIG. 31(B), the display mode of the hold icon HA4 changes from the normal mode to the special mode (gray in FIG. 31(B)) (the hold notice is given). In the example of FIG. 31, the hold icon HA4 is displayed in the normal mode for a moment after being displayed, but it may be displayed in a special mode and the period during which it is displayed in the normal mode may be eliminated.

As another type of reservation notice, there is a reservation notice type in which the reservation icon takes a special mode when it moves, in other words, a reservation icon change notice is given when the special figure 1 reservation is shifted. For example, as shown in FIG. 32(A), from the situation before the hold icon HA4 is displayed (the situation in FIG. 30(D)), a game ball enters the first starting port 11, and the special figure 1 is put on hold. When this occurs, as shown in FIG. 32(B), in response to the occurrence of the special drawing 1 holding, the holding icon HA4 in the normal mode (white in FIG. 32(B)) moves to the aforementioned second area 50d2 (not shown). will be displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 32(C), when the stop display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, the icon HA2, which had been representing the special symbol variation display being executed until immediately before, is erased. Subsequently, when the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol variation effect) is started based on the special symbol 1 reservation represented by the reservation icon HA3, as shown in FIG. 32(D), the special symbol is displayed in the first area 50d1. The hold icon HA3 that was displayed moves to the corresponding display area 50e (not shown), and the hold icon HA4 that was displayed in the second area 50d2 moves to the first area 50d1 (not shown). Here, when the hold icon HA4 moves from the second area 50d2 to the first area 50d1, its display mode changes from a normal mode to a special mode (gray in FIG. 32(D)) (a notice of hold is given) .

Furthermore, it is possible to provide a plurality of types of special modes related to the reservation notice, so that the degree of jackpot expectation can be made different depending on the type of the special mode. For example, it is assumed that the display mode of the hold icon is associated with the color of the hold icon, and white, green, red, and gold are set as the display mode of the hold icon. Here, white is the normal mode, and green, red, and gold are the special modes. The jackpot expectation level indicated by the display mode of the pending icon can be set to increase in the order of white < green < red < gold.

In addition, the pre-reading performance can be performed for both or one of the special figure 1 reservation and the special figure 2 reservation. Further, the pre-read effect is not limited to the display mode of the hold icon HA, but includes images other than the hold icon HA on the display section 50a such as a background image, sound output from the speaker 52, light emission from the frame lamp 53, and board movement. It is possible to perform the operation using a presentation device other than the image display device 50, such as the operation by the device 55. Furthermore, as a production mode of the look-ahead production, in addition to a production mode that continues without interruption from the execution until the special symbol change display starts, such as a pending icon change notice by the pending icon HA, there is also a stoppage of the production pattern. It is also possible to use a performance mode that is executed intermittently and continuously, such as every time a display is performed or a variable display of performance symbols is started.

5. Game control by game control microcomputer 101 [Game control main processing]
Next, game control by the game control microcomputer 101 will be explained based on FIGS. 33 to 42. Note that the flowchart for controlling the game described below is an example. As for the plurality of processes in the flowchart, the order of execution can be changed as appropriate or the processes can be executed in parallel as long as there is no inconsistency in the process contents.

Further, counters, timers, flags, status, buffers, etc. that appear in the game control by the game control microcomputer 101, which will be explained below, are provided in the game RAM 104. Further, the initial value of the counter is "0", the initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", and the initial value of the status is "1".

When the pachinko game machine PY is powered on, the game control microcomputer 101 provided in the game control board 100 reads out and executes the game control main processing program shown in FIG. 33 from the game ROM 103. As shown in the figure, in the game control main process, first, a power-on process (S001) is performed.

In the power-on process, the gaming control microcomputer 101 first sets permission for access to the gaming RAM 104. This makes it possible to write and read information to and from the gaming RAM 104. Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether a RAM clear switch (not shown) mounted on the game control board 100 has been operated (ON or not). The RAM clear switch is basically an operation means that can be operated by a clerk at a game parlor, and when the RAM clear switch is operated, the gaming RAM 104 is cleared.

If the RAM clear switch (not shown) is not operated, the game control microcomputer 101 subsequently determines whether the power-off flag is ON. The power outage flag is a flag that indicates the occurrence of a power outage, and is a flag that is turned on in a power outage monitoring process that will be described later.

If the power-off flag is ON, the game control microcomputer 101 calculates a checksum and compares it with the checksum calculated at the time of the power-off. The checksum is calculated by considering the gaming information stored in the gaming RAM 104 as numerical values.

If the checksum values match, the gaming control microcomputer 101 determines that the storage contents of the gaming RAM 104 are normal, and manages the setting of the working area of the gaming RAM 104 when the power is restored. In this setting process, the power restoration information is read from the gaming ROM 103, and this power restoration information is set in the working area of the gaming RAM 104. Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 101 turns off the power-off flag and performs a power-on command setting process.

In the power-on command setting process, the game control microcomputer 101 performs a setting process for outputting a power-on command to the production control board 120 after a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed. Specifically, a predetermined time until the power-on command is output is set in a timer, and subtraction of the time set in the timer is started. Then, when the value of the subtracted timer becomes "0", it means that a predetermined time has elapsed, so a power-on command is set in a predetermined output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. Thereby, the set power-on command is outputted to the production control board 120 in an output process (S101) described later.

In addition, if the power-off flag is not ON, the power may not have been properly shut off, or if the RAM clear switch (not shown) has been operated, the game control microcomputer 101 Clear all game information stored in RAM 104. Thereafter, the gaming control microcomputer 101 initializes the work area of the gaming RAM 104. In this initial setting process, the initial setting information read from the gaming ROM 103 is set in the working area of the gaming RAM 104. Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 outputs a RAM clear notification command to the production control board 120 to notify that the RAM has been cleared, and performs a power-on command setting process.

After the power-on process, the game control microcomputer 101 disables interrupts (S002) and executes the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003). In this normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003), the counter values of various random numbers related to the regular symbol related determination information and the special symbol related determination information are updated by adding one. When the counter value of each random number reaches the upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. Note that the initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be changed randomly. Further, at least a portion of each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generation circuit including a counter IC or the like.

When the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003) is completed, an interrupt is permitted (S004). While interrupts are enabled, game control side timer interrupt processing (S005) can be executed. The game control side timer interrupt process (S005) is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the gaming CPU 102 at a cycle of, for example, 4 msec. That is, the game control side timer interrupt process (S005) is executed at a cycle of 4 msec. Then, after the game control side timer interrupt process (S005) ends and until the next game control side timer interrupt process (S005) starts, the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S003) The process of updating counter values of various random numbers is repeatedly executed. In addition, if an interrupt pulse is input to the gaming CPU 102 while interrupts are disabled, the gaming control side timer interrupt processing (S005) will not start immediately, but will start after interrupts are enabled (S004). .

[Game control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the game control side timer interrupt processing (S005) will be explained. As shown in FIG. 34, in the game control side timer interrupt processing (S005), output processing (S101) is first executed. In the output process (S101), commands etc. set in the output buffer provided in the game RAM 104 of the game control board 100 in each process described below are output to the production control board 120, payout control board 170, etc.

In the input process (S102) performed after the output process (S101), the game control microcomputer 101 takes in the detection signal from the lower tray full switch that detects the fullness of the surplus ball storage hole 35A, and inputs the detection signal from the lower tray full switch to the game as the lower tray full data. The data is stored in the output buffer of the RAM 104.

The normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103) performed next is the same as the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003) performed in the game control main process of FIG. 33. That is, the updating process of the counter values of various random numbers related to the general figure related determination information and the special figure related determination information is performed during the execution period of the game control side timer interrupt process (S005) and the other period (main side timer interrupt process (S005)). After the end of S005), this is performed both during the period until the next game control side timer interrupt process (S005) is started.

Next to the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103), the game control microcomputer 101 performs a sensor detection process (S104), then performs a normal operation process (S105), and further performs a special operation process (S106). conduct. The sensor detection process, normal operation process, and special operation process will be described later.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 executes other processes (S107) and ends the game control side timer interrupt process (S005). Other processing (S107) includes power-off monitoring processing when the power is cut off, updating of a timer provided in the gaming RAM 104, and the like. Further, as other processing (S107), a payout control process is performed to pay out prize balls to the player. In the payout control process, the prize ball counter for the first starting hole 11, the prize ball counter for the second starting hole 12, the prize ball counter for the big winning hole 14, and the prize ball counter for the general winning hole 10 are set to " A check is made to see if it exceeds "0", and if it exceeds "0", a prize ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control board 170. Then, when transmitting the prize ball signal, an update process is performed to subtract "1" from the prize ball counter related to the signal.

Then, the gaming control microcomputer 101 repeatedly executes steps S002 to S004 of the gaming control main processing until the next interrupt pulse is input to the gaming CPU 102, and when the interrupt pulse is input (approximately 4 msec later) ), the game control side timer interrupt process (S005) is executed again. In the output processing (S101) of the gaming control side timer interrupt processing (S005) executed again, the gaming control microcomputer 101 outputs the data that was set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 in the previous gaming control side timer interrupt processing (S005). Outputs commands etc.

[Sensor detection processing]
Next, sensor detection processing will be explained using FIGS. 35 and 36. In the sensor detection process (S104), first, it is determined whether a game ball has won in the general winning hole 10, that is, whether a game ball has been detected by the general winning hole sensor 10a (S201). If a game ball has not entered the general winning hole 10 (NO in S201), the process advances to step S203, and if a game ball has entered the general winning hole 10 (YES in S201), a predetermined number of game balls have been entered into the game ball. General winning hole prize ball processing for paying out prize balls is performed (S202). In the general winning hole prize ball process, the number of prize balls ("3" in the basic embodiment) corresponding to the winning into the general winning hole 10 is added to the prize ball counter for the general winning hole 10.

In step S203, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the gate 13, that is, whether the game ball has been detected by the gate sensor 13a. If the game ball has not passed through the gate 13 (NO in S203), the process advances to step S207. On the other hand, if the game ball has passed through the gate 13 (YES in S203), whether the normal operation status (described later) is 1 or not, in other words, whether the normal figure variable display or the auxiliary game is being performed. It is determined whether or not (S204). If the normal operation status is not 1 (NO in S204), the process advances to step S207, and if the normal operation status is 1 (YES in S204), the counter value of the normal symbol random number counter (label-TRND-F) is The normal symbol random number indicated by is acquired as the common symbol related determination information (S205), the acquired common symbol related determination information is stored in the common symbol retention storage section 86 provided in the gaming RAM 104 (S206), and step S207 Proceed to.

In step S207, it is determined whether a game ball has entered the second starting port 12, that is, whether a game ball has been detected by the second starting port sensor 12a. If the game ball has not entered the second starting port 12 (NO in S207), the process advances to step S214, and if the game ball has entered the second starting port 12 (YES in S207), the game ball has been placed in the predetermined position. Second starting hole prize ball processing is performed to pay out the number of prize balls (S208). In the second starting hole prize ball process, the number of prize balls (“2” in the basic embodiment) corresponding to the winning to the second starting hole 12 is added to the prize ball counter for the second starting hole 12.

Next, if the number of special drawings 2 pending (specifically the value of the counter (special drawing 2 holding number counter) provided in the gaming RAM 104 that counts the number of special drawings 2 holding) is "4" (upper limit memory number) or more, It is determined whether there is one (S209). If the number of reserved special drawings 2 is "4" or more (YES in S209), the process advances to step S214, but if the number of reserved special drawings 2 is not "4" or more (less than "4"), ( NO in S209), the special figure 2 reservation number addition process is performed (S210). In the special figure 2 reservation number addition process, the special figure 2 reservation number counter is incremented by 1, and the special figure 2 reservation number indicated by the special figure 2 reservation display 83b is increased by 1.

Next, special symbol random number counter (label-TRND-T), jackpot symbol type random number counter (label-TRND-OS), reach random number counter (label-TRND-RC), and special symbol variation pattern random number counter (label-TRND- The special figure 2 related determination information consisting of HP) is acquired and stored in the special figure related determination information buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104 (S211).

Next, a second prefetch determination process is performed (S212). In the second look-ahead determination process, the second start winning command is specified by comparing the current gaming state with the special figure 2 related determination information acquired in step S211 in the second look-ahead determination table shown in FIG. A second starting winning command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 stores the special figure 2 related determination information acquired in step S211 in the special figure 2 reservation storage section 105b (S213).

Subsequently, in step S214, it is determined whether a game ball has entered the first starting port 11, that is, whether a game ball has been detected by the first starting port sensor 11a. If the game ball has not entered the first starting port 11 (NO in S214), the process proceeds to step S221, and if the game ball has entered the first starting port 11 (YES in S214), the game ball has been placed in the predetermined position. First starting hole prize ball processing is performed to pay out the number of prize balls (S215). In the first starting hole prize ball process, the number of prize balls ("4" in the basic embodiment) corresponding to the winning into the first starting hole 11 is added to the prize ball counter for the first starting hole 11.

Next, the number of special figure 1 reservations (specifically, the value of the counter (special figure 1 reservation number counter) provided in the gaming RAM 104 that counts the number of special figure 1 reservations) is "4" (upper limit memory number) or more. It is determined whether or not (S216). If the number of reserved special drawings 1 is "4" or more (YES in S216), the process proceeds to step S221, but if the number of reserved special drawings 1 is not greater than (less than) "4" (NO in S216), the process proceeds to step S221. ), the special figure 1 reservation number addition process is performed (S217). In the special figure 1 reservation number addition process, the special figure 1 reservation number counter is incremented by 1, and the special figure 1 reservation number indicated by the special figure 1 reservation display 83a is increased by 1.

Next, special symbol random number counter (label-TRND-T), jackpot symbol type random number counter (label-TRND-OS), reach random number counter (label-TRND-RC), and special symbol variation pattern random number counter (label-TRND- The special figure 1 related determination information consisting of HP) is acquired and stored in the special figure related determination information buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104 (S218).

Next, a first look-ahead determination process is performed (S219). In the first lookahead determination process, the first start winning command is identified by comparing the current gaming state and the special figure 1 related determination information acquired in step S218 in the first lookahead determination table shown in FIG. A first start winning command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 stores the special figure 1 related determination information acquired in step S218 in a storage area corresponding to the current number of special figure 1 reserves in the special figure 1 reserve storage section 105a (S220).

In step S221, it is determined whether a game ball has won in the big winning hole 14, that is, whether a game ball has been detected by the big winning hole sensor 14a. If a game ball has not entered the grand prize opening 14 (NO in S221), the sensor detection process is terminated, and if a gaming ball has entered the grand prize opening 14 (YES in S221), the memory is stored in the gaming RAM 104. It is determined whether the counter value of the provided big winning opening prize counter is "11" or more (S222). The big winning hole prize counter is a counter for counting the number of prizes won in the big winning hole 14 in one round game of the big winning game. It should be noted that the big winning opening winning counter is cleared every time each round game ends. In the basic embodiment, the prescribed number of prizes to win is set to "10". Therefore, the process of step S222 is performed.

If the counter value of the big winning opening prize counter is "11" or more (YES in S222), the sensor detection process is ended, and the counter value of the big winning opening prize counter is not more than "11", that is, less than "11". If so (NO in S222), the counter value of the big winning hole prize counter is incremented by 1 (S223), and the big winning hole prize ball processing is performed to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls to the player (S224). ), the sensor detection process ends. In addition, in the grand winning hole prize ball process, the number of prize balls ("9" in the basic embodiment) corresponding to the winning to the grand winning hole 14 is added to the prize ball counter for the grand winning hole 14.

Note that sensors other than sensors 10a to 14a are provided as sensors capable of detecting game balls, and processes other than those shown in FIGS. 35 to 36 are performed based on the sensor detecting a game ball. Also good.

[Normal operation processing]
Next, normal operation processing regarding control of the normal figure display 82 and the electric chew 12D will be explained. As shown in FIG. 37, the processing regarding the general figure display 82 and electric chew 12D is divided into four statuses (stages). Then, "normal operation status=1, 2, 3, 4" is assigned to each of these statuses. In the normal operation process (S105), the game control microcomputer 101 first checks the "normal operation status" (S1101). When the "normal operation status" is "1", a normal symbol standby process (S1102) is performed, and when the "normal operation status" is "2", a normal symbol variation process (S1103) is performed, When the "normal operation status" is "3", a normal symbol confirmation process (S1104) is performed, and when the "normal operation status" is "4", an auxiliary game control process (S1105) is performed. Note that the "normal operation status" is initially set to "1".

The normal symbol standby process (S1102) is a process that is performed during standby when the variable display of the normal symbol and the auxiliary game are not performed. In the normal symbol standby process (S1102), a hit determination is performed based on the normal symbol random number stored in the regular symbol reservation storage section 86. Furthermore, the normal pattern fluctuation pattern is determined based on the current game state, and the normal pattern fluctuation pattern is displayed on the normal pattern display 82 for the normal pattern fluctuation time according to the determined general pattern fluctuation pattern. , and change the normal operation status to "2". In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a normal pattern fluctuation start command in accordance with the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination result in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 at the start of the normal pattern fluctuation display.

The normal symbol variation process (S1103) is a process that is performed when the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In the normal symbol variation process (S1103), it is determined whether or not the common symbol variation time has elapsed since the fluctuating display of the common symbol that is being executed has started (whether or not to end the fluctuating display of the common symbol), and If it is determined that the figure variation time has elapsed, the normal figure is stopped and displayed based on the hit determination result, and the normal operation status is changed to "3". Furthermore, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a normal pattern fluctuation stop command to the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 at the start of the normal pattern fluctuation display.

The ordinary symbol confirmation process (S1104) is a process that is performed when the ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed. In the normal symbol confirmation process (S1104), it is determined whether a predetermined stop time (for example, 0.8 seconds) has elapsed since the stop display of the common symbol that is being executed has started (whether to end the stop display of the common symbol). If it is determined that a predetermined stop time has elapsed, it is determined whether or not the common symbol that is being stopped and displayed is a winning symbol. If it is not a winning symbol (if the stopped and displayed regular symbol is a losing symbol), the normal operation status is changed to "1". On the other hand, if the winning symbols are stopped and displayed, the normal operation status is changed to "4" and the auxiliary game is started based on the current game state and the auxiliary game control table. Furthermore, the game control microcomputer 101 sets an auxiliary game start command to the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 at the time of starting the auxiliary game.

The auxiliary game control process (S1105) is a process that is performed when the auxiliary game is being played. In the auxiliary game control process (S1105), the auxiliary game is controlled based on the current gaming state and the auxiliary game control table. Then, when the auxiliary game ends, the normal operation status is changed to "1".

[Special operation processing]
Next, special operation processing regarding the control of the special figure display 81, the special figure pending display 83, and the big prize winning device 14D will be explained. As shown in FIG. 38, the processing regarding the special figure display 81, special figure reservation display 83, and big winning device 14D is divided into five statuses (stages). Then, "special operation status=1, 2, 3, 4, 5" is assigned to each of these statuses. The game control microcomputer 101 first checks the "special operation status" (S1501).

The game control microcomputer 101 performs special symbol standby processing (S1502) when the "special operation status" is "1", and when the "special operation status" is "2", the special symbol fluctuation Perform the process (S1503), and if the "special action status" is "3", perform the special symbol confirmation process (S1504), and if the "special action status" is "4", jackpot game control Processing (S1505) is performed, and if the "special operation status" is "5", gaming state setting processing (S1506) is performed. Note that the "special operation status" is initially set to "1".

The special symbol standby process (S1502) is a process that is performed during standby when variable display of special symbols and jackpot games are not being performed. The special symbol standby process will be detailed later.

The special symbol variation process (S1503) is a process performed when the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. The special symbol variation process will be detailed later.

The special symbol confirmation process (S1504) is a process performed when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. The special symbol confirmation process will be detailed later.

The jackpot game control process (S1505) is a process performed in the jackpot game. The game control microcomputer 101 performs a jackpot game according to the jackpot game control table by performing jackpot game control processing. When the jackpot game ends, the special operation status is changed to "5". Note that when each round game is started, a round number designation command indicating the number of rounds is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. Further, when all the round games are finished and the ending is started, an ending command indicating the ending corresponding to the jackpot symbol related to the jackpot game is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the special operation status "4" and the state where the jackpot game is controlled is the "jackpot game state", and the setting of the special operation status "4" is called "jackpot". It is called "gaming state".

The game state setting process (S1506) is a process for setting the game state to be controlled after the jackpot game when the jackpot game ends. For example, when controlling in a high probability state after a jackpot game, the high probability flag is turned on in the high probability flag area of the gaming RAM 104 to set the high probability state. Furthermore, at this time, if the duration of the high probability state is to be limited, the duration is also set. For example, if the termination condition for the high probability state is the number of times the special figure variable display is executed, that number (hereinafter referred to as "high probability specified number of times") is set in the high probability remaining number of times counter provided in the gaming RAM 104. . In addition, when controlling in a time saving state after a jackpot game, the time saving flag is turned ON in the time saving flag area of the gaming RAM 104 to set the time saving state. Furthermore, at this time, if the duration of the time saving state is to be limited, the duration is also set. For example, when the end condition of the time saving state is the number of executions of the special figure variable display, the number of times (hereinafter referred to as "time saving specified number of times") is set in the remaining time saving number counter provided in the gaming RAM 104.

In addition, the gaming control microcomputer 101 sets a gaming status command indicating the gaming status after the jackpot game in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 in the gaming status setting process.

[Special symbol standby processing]
Next, the special symbol standby process will be explained using FIG. 39. In the special symbol standby process (S1502), first, it is determined whether the special symbol 2 pending number is "0" (S1601). If the special figure 2 reservation number is "0" (YES in S1601), that is, if there is no memory of the special figure 2 related judgment information acquired due to winning in the second starting opening 12, It is determined whether the number of 1 reservations is "0" (S1608). Then, if the number of reserved special drawings 1 is also "0" (YES in S1608), that is, if there is no memory of the special drawing 1 related judgment information acquired due to winning in the first starting opening 11, It is determined whether the customer waiting flag is ON (S1618). Here, if the customer waiting flag is ON (YES in S1618), the special symbol waiting process is finished, and if the customer waiting flag is not ON (NO in S1618), the customer waiting command is set in the output buffer (S1619). , turns on the customer waiting flag (S1620), and ends the special symbol waiting process.

In addition, if the number of special drawings 2 reserved is "0" but the number of special drawings 1 holding is not "0" (YES in S1601 and NO in S1608), that is, there is no special drawing 2 related determination information, but the first start If there is one or more stored pieces of special figure 1 related determination information acquired due to winning in the mouth 11, special figure 1 determination processing (S1609) and special figure 1 variation pattern determination processing (S1610) are performed.

In the special symbol 1 determination process (S1609), the first stored special symbol random number among the special symbol random numbers stored in the special symbol 1 pending storage unit 105a is read out, and the special symbol random number is read out based on the jackpot determination table associated with the gaming state. Then, a judgment is made as to whether it is a jackpot or a loss (jackpot judgment).

Here, if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the jackpot symbol type random number is read out and the jackpot symbol type is determined based on the first jackpot symbol type determination table (jackpot symbol type determination). Then, jackpot symbol data representing the jackpot symbol type is set in a special symbol buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104, and a symbol designation command representing the jackpot symbol type is set in the output buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104.

Furthermore, if the result of the jackpot determination is a "loss", loss symbol data representing a loss is set in the special pattern buffer, and a symbol designation command representing a loss is set in the output buffer.

Next, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process (S1610) will be explained using FIG. 40. In the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process, first, it is determined whether or not it is currently in a non-time saving state (S1651). If it is a non-time-saving state (YES in S1651), select the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the non-time-saving state (S1652) and proceed to step S1654; if it is not in a non-time-saving state (NO in S1651), the time-saving After selecting the state special figure 1 variation pattern determination table (S1653), the process advances to step S1654.

In step S1654, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether the jackpot determination result is a "jackpot". If it is not a jackpot (NO in S1654), the process advances to step S1655, and if it is a jackpot (YES in S1654), a jackpot symbol is selected from the special symbol 1 variation pattern determination table selected in either step S1652 or step S1653. After selecting the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table (S1659), the process advances to step S1660.

In step S1655, the game control microcomputer 101 performs reach determination. In the reach determination, a reach random number is read out, and the reach random number is compared with a reach determination table according to the current gaming state (non-time saving state/time saving state) to determine whether there is a reach or no reach.

The game control microcomputer 101 next determines whether or not the result of the reach determination in step S1655 is "with reach" (S1656). If there is a reach (YES in S1656), select a special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table for loss with reach from the special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table selected in either step S1652 or step S1653 (S1658). After that, the process advances to step S1660, and if there is no reach (NO in S1656), the current number of reserved special symbols 1 is checked, and the result is selected in the special symbol 1 variation pattern determination table selected in either step S1652 or step S1653. After selecting the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for no-reach loss according to the number of reserved special figures 1 (S1657), the process proceeds to step S1660.

In step S1660, the game control microcomputer 101 reads out the special pattern variation pattern random number, and compares the special pattern variation pattern random number with the special pattern 1 variation pattern determination table selected in any of steps S1657 to S1659. Determine the special figure 1 variation pattern The special figure 1 variation pattern is determined. Next, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a special figure 1 variation start command indicating the determined special figure 1 variation pattern in the output buffer (S1661), and starts the special figure 1 variation according to the determined special figure 1 variation pattern. The time is set in the special operation timer (S1662), the special symbol 1 variation pattern determination process is ended, and the process returns to the special symbol standby process.

Note that the special operation timer is updated by 4ms in other processing in the game control side timer interrupt processing. In addition, the set special figure 1 variation start command includes information regarding the type of special symbol (that it is special figure 1) and information about the special figure variation pattern judgment performed in the special figure 1 variation pattern judgment process (S1610). Contains information about the results (information on special pattern fluctuation patterns, including information on whether there is a reach or not and special symbol fluctuation time).

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 causes the special pattern 1 display 81a to start displaying the special pattern 1 in a variable manner based on the special pattern variation time corresponding to the special pattern 1 variation pattern determined in step S1610 (S1611). .

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 shifts the storage location (storage area) of various counter values in the special figure 1 reservation storage section 105a from the current position to the side where it is read out, and also shifts the storage location (storage area) of the various counter values in the special figure 1 reservation storage section 105a Special figure 1 reservation storage section shift processing is performed to clear the storage area corresponding to the first reservation (the storage area farthest from the read side) (S1612). In this way, the special drawing 1 reservations are consumed in the order in which they were reserved.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 subtracts "1" from the special figure 1 reservation number counter (S1613), and changes the special figure 1 reservation number indicated by the special figure 1 reservation display 83a by decreasing it by "1" ( S1614), and changes the special operation status to "2" (S1615).

The game control microcomputer 101 then determines whether or not the customer waiting flag is ON (S1616), and if it is ON (YES in S1616), turns the customer waiting flag OFF (S1617), and performs special symbol waiting processing. If it is not ON (NO in S1616), the special symbol standby process ends without executing step S1617.

In addition, if the number of special drawings 2 reserved is not "0" in step S1601 (NO in S1601), that is, one or more pieces of special drawings 2 related judgment information acquired due to winning in the second starting port 12 are stored. If there is, special figure 2 determination processing (S1602) and special figure 2 variation pattern determination processing (S1603) are performed. The special figure 2 judgment process (S1602) and the special figure 2 variation pattern judgment process (S1603) are basically the same processing contents as the special figure 1 judgment process (S1609) and the special figure 1 variation pattern judgment process (S1610). .

The special figure 2 determination process (S1602) is basically the same except that the table used for jackpot determination is the second jackpot determination table, and the table used for jackpot symbol type determination is the second jackpot symbol type determination table. Since this process is similar to the special figure 1 determination process (S1609), the explanation will be omitted. In addition, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination process (S1603) is also basically the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process (S1603), except that the table used in the special figure 2 variation pattern determination is the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table. Since this process is similar to S1610), the explanation will be omitted.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 causes the special figure 2 display 81b to start variable display of the special figure 2 based on the special figure variation time according to the special figure variation pattern determined in step S1603 (S1604).

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 shifts the storage location (storage area) of various counter values in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b from the current position to the side where it is read out, and also shifts the storage location (storage area) of the various counter values in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b to A special figure 2 reservation storage section shift process is performed to clear the storage area corresponding to the fourth reservation (the storage area farthest from the read side) (S1605). In this way, the special drawing 2 reservations are consumed in the order in which they were reserved.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 subtracts "1" from the special map 2 reservation number counter (S1606), and changes the special map 2 reservation number indicated by the special map 2 reservation display 83b by decreasing it by "1" (S1607). ), the special operation status is changed to "2" (S1615), and the process advances to step S1616.

In the basic embodiment as described above, the variable display of the special symbol based on the special symbol 1 reservation is performed only when the special symbol 2 reservation is "0" (YES in S1601). That is, the extinguishment of the special figure 2 reservation is executed in priority to the extinguishment of the special figure 1 reservation. In the basic embodiment, it is easier for the player to win a jackpot symbol with a large profit in the lottery based on the special symbol 2 reservation than in the lottery based on the special symbol 1 reservation. In addition, the extinguishment of the special figure 1 reservation may be executed in priority to the extinguishment of the special figure 2 reservation. Moreover, the extinguishment of the special figure 1 hold and the extinguishment of the special figure 2 hold may be performed in the order in which the hold occurs, regardless of the type of special figure.

[Special symbol variation processing]
Next, the special symbol variation process will be explained using FIG. 41. In the special symbol variation process, the game control microcomputer 101 first determines whether or not to end the variation display of the special symbol, that is, when the special symbol variation time set in the special operation timer in step S1603 or step S1610 has elapsed (special It is determined whether the operation counter=0) (S1701). If you do not want to end the fluctuating display of special symbols (NO in S1701), you can end the special symbol fluctuating process, and if you want to end the fluctuating display of special symbols (YES in S1701), you can display the fluctuating special symbols on the special symbol display 81. At the same time, special symbols are stopped and displayed according to the symbol data (jackpot symbol data or loss special symbol data) set in the special symbol buffer in step S1602 or step S1609 (S1702).

Next, a preset special symbol confirmation time (for example, 0.8 seconds) is set in the special operation timer (S1703), and a special symbol variation stop command indicating the end of the variation display of the special symbol is output to the buffer. (S1704), changes the special operation status to "3" (S1705), and ends the special symbol variation process.

[Special design confirmation process]
Next, the special symbol determination process will be explained using FIG. 42. In the special symbol confirmation process (S1504), the game control microcomputer 101 first determines whether or not to end the stop display of the special symbol, that is, when the special symbol confirmation time set in the special operation timer in step S1703 has elapsed (special It is determined whether the operation counter=0) (S1751). If you do not want to end the special symbol stop display (NO in S1751), if you end the special symbol confirmation process and end the special symbol stop display (YES in S1751), you are currently in a normal probability state (high probability flag is OFF). It is determined whether or not (S1752). Note that the elapse of the special symbol confirmation time after the stop display of the special symbol starts is sometimes referred to as "the special symbol is confirmed."

If the game control microcomputer 101 is not currently in the normal probability state (NO in S1752), the process proceeds to step S1757, and if it is currently in the normal probability state (YES in S1752), it is in the time saving state (time saving flag is ON). It is determined whether or not (S1753). If the game control microcomputer 101 is not in the time-saving state (NO in S1753), the process advances to step S1757, and if it is currently in the time-saving state (YES in S1753), it displays the remaining variable displays of special symbols that can be executed in the time-saving state. The value of the remaining time saving number counter that measures the number of times (remaining number of time saving) is subtracted by "1" (S1754), and it is determined whether the value of the remaining time saving number counter is "0" (S1755). If the value of the remaining time saving counter (remaining number of time saving) is not "0" (NO in S1755), the process advances to step S1757, and if the value of the remaining time saving number counter (remaining number of time saving) is "0" (in S1755) YES), the time-saving state is shifted to a non-time-saving state (the time-saving flag is turned OFF) (S1756), and the process proceeds to step S1757.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 checks the current game state, sets a game state command indicating the game state in the output buffer (S1757), and determines whether the special symbol currently being stopped and displayed is a jackpot symbol. (S1758). If it is not a jackpot symbol (NO in S1758), change the special operation status to "1" (S1762), finish the special symbol confirmation process, and if it is a jackpot symbol (YES in S1758), reset the gaming state ( The normal gaming state is set. Specifically, the high probability flag and time saving flag are turned OFF, and the values of the high probability remaining number of times counter and time saving remaining number of times counter are set to "0") (S1759).

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 performs a jackpot game preparation process (S1760), changes the special operation status to "4" (S1761), and ends the special symbol confirmation process. In the jackpot game preparation process, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a jackpot game control table corresponding to the type of jackpot symbol in a predetermined area of the gaming RAM 104. In addition, a jackpot opening flag indicating that the opening is in progress according to the jackpot symbol that is being stopped and displayed is turned on in a predetermined area of the gaming RAM 104, and a predetermined opening time (the jackpot game starts) is set according to the type of the jackpot symbol. Set the time from the time the game is played until the start of one round) to the special operation timer. Furthermore, in accordance with the type of jackpot symbol, an opening command (jackpot opening command) indicating the type of jackpot symbol is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. The opening command corresponding to the type of jackpot symbol (jackpot opening command) indicates that a jackpot game (opening of the jackpot game) corresponding to the type of the stopped and displayed jackpot symbol is started.

6. Control of production by production control board 120 [Production control main processing]
Next, the control of effects by the effect control board 120 will be explained using the flowcharts shown in FIGS. 43 to 47. Note that the flowchart for controlling the effects described below is an example. As for the plurality of processes in the flowchart, the order of execution can be changed as appropriate or the processes can be executed in parallel as long as there is no inconsistency in the process contents.

In addition, counters, timers, flags, buffers, etc. that appear in the explanation of the control of effects by the effect control board 120 below are provided in the effect RAM 124. When the power of the pachinko game machine PY is turned on, the performance control microcomputer 121 provided in the performance control board 120 reads out the sub-control main processing program shown in FIG. 43 from the performance ROM 123 and executes it.

As shown in the figure, in the production control main process, first, a power-on process is performed in response to power-on (S4001). In the power-on process, for example, settings for the performance CPU 122, SIO, PIO, CTC (circuit for managing interrupt time), etc. are performed.

Next, interrupts are prohibited (S4002), and random number seed update processing is executed (S4003). In the random number seed update process (S4003), the values of various performance determination random number counters for making determinations regarding various performances are updated. Note that the random numbers for performance determination include various random numbers for determining performance content, such as a random number for determining a stop symbol pattern and a random number for determining a special symbol variation performance pattern, which will be described later.

As an example, the method for updating the random number counter for judgment regarding various performances can be the same as the random number updating process performed by the game control board 100 described above. When updating, the random numbers may be added by 2 instead of being added by 1. This also applies to the random number update process performed by the game control board 100 described above.

When the random number seed update process is completed, a command transmission process is executed (S4004). In the command transmission process, various commands stored in the output buffer in the performance RAM 124 of the performance control board 120 (for example, a special figure fluctuation performance start command, a customer waiting start command, an opening performance start command, a round performance start command, which will be described later) command, ending effect start command, etc.) to the image control board 140.

The image control board 140 that has received the command displays an image on the display unit 50a (performs various effects using the image) according to the received command. In addition to the various performances performed by the image control board 140, the production control board 120 outputs audio from the speaker 52 via the audio control circuit 161 (executes various performances using audio), and controls the sub-drive board. 162 to cause the frame lamp 53 to emit light (to perform various effects by emitting light), and to operate the board movable body 55k (to perform various effects by movement). The various performances include a special figure variation performance, a jackpot game performance (jackpot opening performance, round performance, jackpot ending performance), customer waiting performance, operation performance, and pre-reading performance.

The production control microcomputer 121 then permits an interrupt (S4005). Thereafter, steps S4002 to S4005 are looped. While interrupts are enabled, reception interrupt processing (S4010), 1ms timer interrupt processing (S4011), and 10ms timer interrupt processing (S4012) can be executed. The 1ms timer interrupt processing (S4011) and the 10ms timer interrupt processing (S4012) will be described later.

The reception interrupt process (S4010) is executed every time a strobe signal, that is, various commands sent from the game control board 100, is input to the external INT input section of the production control microcomputer 121. In the reception interrupt process (S4010), the production control microcomputer 121 stores various commands transmitted and received by the output process (S101) of the game control board 100 in the reception buffer of the production RAM 124. This reception interrupt processing is executed with priority over other interrupt processing (S4011, S4012).

[1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, 1ms timer interrupt processing will be explained using FIG. 44. The 1ms timer interrupt process (S4011) is executed every time an interrupt pulse of 1ms period is input to the production control board 120. The performance control microcomputer 121 first performs input processing (S4101) in the 1ms timer interrupt processing (S4011). In the input process, the production control microcomputer 121 creates first production button switch data based on the detection signal from the first production button sensor 40a. The performance control microcomputer 121 creates second performance button switch data based on the detection signal from the second performance button sensor 41a.

Subsequently, the performance control microcomputer 121 performs light emission data output processing (S4102). In the light emission data output process, the production control microcomputer 121 uses the light emission data created in the light emission data creation process (S4203) in the 10ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in order to cause the frame lamp 53 to emit light at a timing that matches the image production, etc. is output to the sub-drive board 162. That is, the production control microcomputer 121 causes the frame lamp 53 to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode according to the light emission data.

Next, the performance control microcomputer 121 performs a movable device control process (S4103). In the movable device control process, the performance control microcomputer 121 creates or outputs drive data (data for driving the movable board 55k) in order to drive the movable board 55k at a predetermined timing. That is, the performance control microcomputer 121 drives the board movable body 55k in a predetermined operation mode according to the drive data.

Next, the production control microcomputer 121 performs a timer update process (S4104). In the timer update process, various timers provided in the performance RAM 124, which will be described later, are updated in order to manage and control time related to various predetermined performances. In this process, the timer provided in the effect RAM 124 is updated by 1 msec.

Then, the production control microcomputer 121 performs watchdog timer processing to reset the watchdog timer (S4105), and ends the 1ms timer interrupt processing.

[10ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, 10ms timer interrupt processing will be explained using FIG. 45. The 10ms timer interrupt process (S4012) is executed every time an interrupt pulse with a period of 10msec is input to the production control board 120. In the 10ms timer interrupt process, the production control microcomputer 121 first performs a received command analysis process to analyze the command stored in the receive buffer in step S4010 (S4201). The received command analysis process will be explained in detail in the basic embodiment described below.

Next, the performance control microcomputer 121 performs audio control processing (S4202). In the audio control process, audio data (data that controls the output of audio from the speaker 52) is created and sent to the audio control circuit 161 based on the performance content indicated by the special figure variation performance data set in the performance RAM 124. is output.

Next, the performance control microcomputer 121 performs a light emission data creation process (S4203). In the light emission data creation process, light emission data is created based on the performance contents indicated by the special symbol variation performance data set in the performance RAM 124, and the like.

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, the received command analysis process will be explained using FIGS. 46 and 47. In the received command analysis process, the performance control microcomputer 121 first determines whether or not it has received a start winning command (first start winning command or second start winning command) from the gaming control board 100, in other words, it has received a start winning command. It is determined whether the data has been stored in the buffer (S4301). If the performance control microcomputer 121 has received the start winning command (YES in S4301), it proceeds to step S4302, whereas if it has not received the start winning command (NO in S4301), it proceeds to step S4303.

In step S4302, the performance control microcomputer 121 performs a starting winning process in response to the game ball winning in the first starting opening 11 or the second starting opening 12. In the starting winning process, the received starting winning command is stored in the starting winning command pending storage section 125 in the performance RAM 124. Next, the performance control microcomputer 121 analyzes the stored starting winning command and determines whether or not to execute a pre-read performance that indicates the expected level of jackpot. In addition to a pending notice in which a pending icon is displayed in a special manner, the pre-reading effect includes a continuous notice effect that is performed over a plurality of consecutive variable displays of special symbols. When it is decided to execute these pre-read effects, a pre-read effect start command for executing the decided effects is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124.

When the prefetch effect start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is sent to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 starts the predetermined effect from the image ROM 142. The image is read out and a pre-read effect using the image is performed on the display section 50a of the image display device 50. In addition, while the image control board 140 is performing a prefetch effect using images, the effect control microcomputer 121 controls audio according to the prefetch effect content indicated by the prefetch effect start command transmitted to the image control board 140. Sound is output from the speaker 52 via the circuit 161 (executing a pre-reading effect using audio), and the frame lamp 53 is made to emit light via the sub-drive board 162 (performing a pre-reading effect using light emission). It is possible to operate 55k (execute a look-ahead effect by operation).

In step S4303, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether the symbol designation command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether the symbol designation command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the production control microcomputer 121 has not received the symbol designation command (NO in S4303), the process proceeds to step S4305, while if it has received the symbol designation command (YES in S4303), the production control microcomputer 121 transfers the symbol designation command to the production RAM 124. The symbol designation command is stored in the symbol designation command storage section 126 (S4304).

In step S4305, the production control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the special figure fluctuation start command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether the special figure fluctuation start command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the special figure variation start command has not been received (NO in S4305), the process proceeds to step S4307, while if the special figure variation start command has been received (YES in S4305), the production contents of the special figure variation production are determined. , performs a special figure variation effect start process (S4306) for starting the special figure variation effect.

In the special figure variation production start process, the production control microcomputer 121 first stores a special figure variation start command in the special figure variation start command storage section 127 in the production RAM 124. Next, based on the contents of the stop special symbol (type of jackpot symbol, losing special symbol) indicated by the symbol designation command already stored in step S4304 and the special symbol variation pattern indicated by the special symbol variation start command, the production symbol EZ1 is stopped and displayed. -EZ3, and a stop symbol pattern determination table for performing a stop symbol determination for determining small symbols KZ1 to KZ3. A plurality of stop symbol pattern determination tables are provided in association with special symbols and special symbol variation patterns. Therefore, the performance control microcomputer 121 selects one stop symbol pattern determination table associated with the stop special symbol and the special symbol variation pattern. In each stop symbol pattern determination table, the values of random numbers for stop symbol pattern determination (stop symbol pattern determination value) are distributed. Next, the performance control microcomputer 121 acquires the value indicated by the stop symbol pattern determination random number counter as a stop symbol pattern determination random number, and performs a stop symbol pattern determination based on the acquired stop symbol pattern determination random number.

In the stop symbol pattern determination, the performance control microcomputer 121 collates the acquired random number for stop symbol pattern determination with the selected stop symbol pattern table and determines the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 to be stopped and displayed. Then, data representing the determined performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are set in a predetermined area of the performance RAM 124. For example, if the special symbol variation pattern is a no-reach variation, a combination of production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is selected so as to result in a so-called "missing pattern". In addition, if the special symbol variation pattern is a reach/loss variation, the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to The KZ3 combination is selected. Furthermore, if the special symbol variation pattern is a jackpot variation, a combination of production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is selected to form a so-called "Zero" according to the production mode and the type of jackpot symbol. .

Next, the performance control microcomputer 121 generates a special figure fluctuation performance pattern in which the performance contents of the special figure fluctuation performance are associated, based on the performance mode in which it is staying and the special figure fluctuation pattern indicated by the special figure fluctuation start command. Select a special figure variation performance pattern determination table for determining the special figure variation performance pattern to be determined. A plurality of special figure variation performance pattern determination tables are provided in association with production modes and special figure variation patterns. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 121 selects one special symbol variation production pattern determination table that is associated with the special symbol variation pattern. In each special figure fluctuation performance pattern judgment table, the value of the random number for special figure fluctuation performance pattern judgment (special figure fluctuation performance pattern Judgment values) are distributed. Next, the performance control microcomputer 121 acquires the value indicated by the random number counter for special figure fluctuation performance pattern determination as a random number for special figure fluctuation performance pattern determination, and selects a special figure based on the acquired random number for special figure fluctuation performance pattern determination. Performs fluctuation performance pattern judgment.

In the special pattern variation performance pattern determination, the performance control microcomputer 121 collates the acquired special pattern variation performance pattern determination random number with the selected special pattern variation performance pattern table, determines the special pattern variation performance pattern, and determines the special pattern variation performance pattern. The data representing the special figure variation performance pattern (special figure variation performance pattern data) is set in a predetermined area of the performance RAM 124, and a special figure fluctuation performance start command indicating the special figure fluctuation performance pattern is set in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124. set.

When the special figure variation effect start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 executes a predetermined command from the image ROM 142. The effect image is read out, and a special figure variation effect is performed using the image on the display section 50a of the image display device 50.

In addition, the special figure variation performance start command includes information regarding the production flow associated with the special figure variation pattern indicated by the special figure variation start command. In addition, the special figure variation effect start command includes, in addition to the special figure variation effect using images performed on the image display device 50, the special figure variation effect using audio output from the speaker 52, and the special figure variation effect using light emitted from the frame lamp 53. It includes the performance content of the figure variation performance and the performance content of the special figure variation performance based on the operation performed by the board movable body 55k.

In addition, the production control microcomputer 121 controls the special symbol variation production content indicated by the special symbol variation production start command sent to the image control board 140 while the special symbol variation production using images is being performed by the image control board 140. In response to this, the speaker 52 outputs audio via the audio control circuit 161 (executes the special figure variation effect using audio), and causes the frame lamp 53 to emit light via the sub-drive board 162 (executes the special figure variation effect by emitting light). (performs a variable effect), and operates the board movable body 55k (executes a special figure variable effect by operation).

In step S4307, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the special figure fluctuation stop command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether the special figure fluctuation stop command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the production control microcomputer 121 has not received the special symbol fluctuation stop command (NO in S4307), the process proceeds to step S4309, while if it has received the special symbol fluctuation stop command (YES in S4307), the special symbol fluctuation stops. A special symbol variation performance end process (S4308) is performed to end the performance (stop the variable display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 and perform a stop display).

In the special pattern fluctuation performance end process, the performance control microcomputer 121 analyzes the special pattern fluctuation stop command, and ends the special pattern fluctuation performance appropriately based on the analysis result (performance patterns EZ1 to EZ3, and small pattern KZ1). A special figure variation effect end command for stopping the variable display of KZ3 is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. When the image control board 140 receives the special symbol variation production end command, it ends the special symbol variation production that is being executed (stops the variation production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3).

In step S4309, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the game state command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the game state command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the production control microcomputer 121 has not received the gaming state command (NO in S4309), it proceeds to step S4311, whereas if it has received the gaming state command (YES in S4309), it analyzes the gaming state command. , identifies the gaming state represented by the gaming state command, and performs a gaming state setting process for setting the gaming state (S4310).

The production control microcomputer 121 sets a gaming state flag corresponding to the gaming state indicated by the gaming state command in the gaming state flag area of the production RAM 124 in the gaming state setting process. For example, the production control microcomputer 121 sets the gaming state flag "00H" in the gaming state flag area of the production RAM 124 if the gaming state indicated by the gaming state command is the normal gaming state. Further, the production control microcomputer 121 sets the gaming state flag "01H" in the gaming state flag area of the production RAM 124 if the gaming state indicated by the gaming state command is a high probability high base gaming state. Further, the performance control microcomputer 121 sets a gaming state flag "02H" in the gaming state flag area of the performance RAM 124 if the gaming state indicated by the gaming state command is a low probability high base gaming state.

In step S4311, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not a customer waiting command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the customer waiting command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the performance control microcomputer 121 has not received the customer waiting command (NO in S4311), the process proceeds to step S4313, while if it has received the customer waiting command (YES in S4311), it performs customer waiting performance standby processing. (S4312), the received command analysis process ends.

In the customer waiting performance standby process, the performance control microcomputer 121 controls the waiting time (customer waiting performance waiting time: for example, 20 seconds) from the stop display of the performance pattern to the start of the customer waiting performance. Set it on a timer. Note that the performance control microcomputer 121 can determine whether or not this waiting time has elapsed, and if it determines that the waiting time has elapsed, it sends a customer waiting performance start command to the performance RAM 124 to start the customer waiting performance. set in the output buffer of

In step S4313, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether the jackpot opening command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether the jackpot opening command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the production control microcomputer 121 has not received the jackpot opening command (NO in S4313), it proceeds to step S4315, whereas if it has received the jackpot opening command (YES in S4313), it starts the opening of the jackpot game. An accompanying jackpot opening performance start process is performed (S4314).

In the jackpot opening production start process, the production control microcomputer 121 analyzes the jackpot opening command and, based on the analysis result, determines whether to execute the jackpot opening production according to the opening of the jackpot game to be executed from now on. If it is determined and executed, select the performance content of the jackpot opening performance (jackpot opening performance pattern), and write a jackpot opening performance start command in the performance RAM 124 to start the jackpot opening performance with the selected jackpot opening performance pattern. Set to output buffer.

In step S4315, the production control microcomputer 121 determines whether the number of rounds designation command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether the number of rounds designation command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the number of rounds designation command has not been received (NO in S4315), the process proceeds to step S4317, while if the number of rounds designation command has been received (YES in S4315), round production start processing is performed in conjunction with the start of the round game. (S4316).

In the round performance start process, the production control microcomputer 121 analyzes the number of rounds designation command, determines whether or not to execute a round production according to the round game to be started from now on, and if it is to be executed, executes the round production. The performance content (round performance pattern) is selected, and a round performance start command corresponding to the selected round performance pattern is set in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124.

In step S4317, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether the ending command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether the ending command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the ending command has not been received (NO in S4317), the received command analysis process is finished, while if the ending command has been received (YES in S4317), the jackpot ending performance start process ( After performing S4318) and production mode setting processing (S4319), the received command analysis processing ends.

In the jackpot ending production start process, the production control microcomputer 121 analyzes the ending command and determines whether or not to execute the jackpot ending production according to the ending of the jackpot game that will be executed from now on. The performance content (jackpot ending performance pattern) of the jackpot ending performance is selected, and a jackpot ending performance start command corresponding to the selected jackpot ending performance pattern is set in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124.

In addition, the performance control microcomputer 121 performs a process of setting the performance mode after the jackpot game (setting the performance mode) based on the analysis result of the ending command, specifically, the jackpot symbol indicated by the ending command, in the performance mode setting process. control processing).

For example, when the jackpot symbol indicated by the jackpot ending command is the jackpot symbol A or the jackpot symbol D, the production control microcomputer 121 sets it to a probability variable production mode that suggests a high probability high base gaming state. Then, a performance mode flag indicating the variable probability performance mode is turned on in a predetermined area of the performance RAM 124, and a variable probability performance mode start command indicating setting of the variable probability performance mode is set in the output buffer of the RAM 124 for performance. When the variable performance mode start command set in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 executes the command at the timing when the ending ends. , displays the background image G120 for probability variation as a background image, and outputs the BGM for probability variation as BGM.

In addition, when the jackpot symbol indicated by the jackpot ending command is jackpot symbol B, jackpot symbol C, or jackpot symbol E, the performance control microcomputer 121 selects either a high probability high base gaming state or a low probability high base gaming state. Set a time-saving mode in which it is difficult or impossible to determine whether the Then, the performance control microcomputer 121 turns on the performance mode flag indicating the time-saving performance mode in a predetermined area of the performance RAM 124, and sends a time-saving performance mode start command indicating that the time-saving performance mode is set to the output buffer of the performance RAM 124. Set to . When the time-saving production mode start command set in the output buffer of the production RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 executes the command at the timing when the ending ends. , the time-saving background image G130 is displayed as the background image, and the time-saving BGM is output as the BGM.

<First embodiment>
Next, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described based on the basic embodiment of the present invention described above. In the following, differences from the basic embodiment will be mainly described as the first embodiment. Furthermore, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as those in the basic embodiment or similarly corresponding configurations.

The pachinko game machine PY1 according to the first embodiment is composed of a so-called "one-type, two-type mixed machine." In one pachinko game machine PY1, when a special drawing 1 lottery is held and a jackpot is won when a game ball enters the first starting slot 11, a jackpot game in which the first jackpot 14 (described later) is opened is played. When a special drawing 2 lottery is held based on the specification called "Type 1 (so-called "DigiPachi type")" and the winning of the game ball into the second starting hole 12, and you win a small prize, A small winning game in which a second big prize opening 15 (described later) is opened is executed, and a game ball that enters the second big prize opening 15 opened in the small winning game is placed in a specific area 16 (so-called "V zone"), which will be described later. There is also a specification called "second type (so-called "feather monotype")" in which a jackpot game is executed when the player passes (so-called "V winning").

Here, FIG. 48 shows a front view of the game board unit YU of the pachinko game machine PY1. As shown in FIG. 48, the gaming area 6 includes a first grand prize device 14D and a second grand prize device 15D that can be reversibly changed between a state in which game balls cannot win and a state in which they can win. is provided. The first big winning device 14D corresponds to the big winning device 14D of the basic embodiment. Therefore, the first grand prize winning device 14D is formed with a first grand prize opening 14 that can change between a closed mode in which a game ball cannot enter and an open mode in which a game ball can enter. 14 takes a closed mode and an open mode by a first AT opening/closing member 14k provided in the first big prize winning device 14D. Further, the first big winning device 14D is provided with a first big winning hole sensor 14a that detects that the game ball has entered the first big winning hole 14 (winning).

The second grand prize device 15D is provided directly under the downstream side of the first grand prize device 14D, and is partially configured in the same manner as the first grand prize device 14D. The second grand prize winning device 15D is formed with a second grand prize opening 15 that can change between a closed mode in which a game ball cannot enter and an open mode in which a game ball can enter. , it takes a closed mode and an open mode by the second AT opening/closing member 15k provided in the second big winning device 15D. Further, the second big winning device 15D is provided with a second big winning hole sensor 15a that detects that the game ball has entered the second big winning hole 15 (winning).

In addition, in the first embodiment, 15 prize balls are paid out as the balls enter the first big winning hole 14. In addition, 15 prize balls are paid out as the balls enter the second grand prize opening 15.

Next, the structure of the game board 1 after the game ball enters the second grand prize opening 15 will be explained. FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the configuration of the game board 1 after the game ball enters the second grand prize opening 15. As shown in FIG. 49, as a configuration after the game ball enters the second grand prize opening 15, a specific area 16 and a non-specific area 17 are provided through which the gaming ball that entered the second grand prize opening 15 can pass. It is being Further, a sorting member 16k is provided which can sort the game balls that have entered the second big prize opening 15 into a specific area 16 and a non-specific area 17.

The distribution member 16k is configured to be movable forward and backward by a distribution solenoid 16s (see FIG. 50). The distribution solenoid 16s is electrically connected to the game control microcomputer 101, and the game control microcomputer 101 can control the distribution solenoid 16s in a small winning game to be described later.

The game control microcomputer 101 moves the distribution member 16k forward and backward using the distribution solenoid 16s, thereby setting a first passage state in which the game ball that has entered the second big prize opening 15 can pass through the specific area 16, and a second state. It is possible to set the state to either a second passing state in which the game ball that enters the two major winning holes 15 can pass through the non-specific area 17. The sorting member 16k is normally held at the advanced position so as to be in the second passing state, and when playing a small winning game, it is retracted to the retracted position for a predetermined time (for example, 2.8 seconds) and then returned to the first passing state. Change. Details of the operation of the distribution member 16k in the small winning game will be described later.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is provided with a specific area sensor 16a (see FIG. 50) that detects game balls that have passed through the specific area 16, but does not detect game balls that have passed through the non-specific area 17. The specific area sensor 16a is electrically connected to the game control microcomputer 101, and when detecting a game ball, outputs a detection signal indicating that the game ball has passed through the specific area 16 to the game control board 100.

In addition, a transparent window (not shown) made of synthetic resin is provided in front of the specific area 16 and the non-specific area 17, so that the game ball that has entered the second grand prize opening 15 can pass through the specific area 16 and the non-specific area. The player can visually confirm which of the 17 passes the player has passed.

Next, the electrical configuration of the game control board 100 side in the pachinko game machine PY1 will be explained. FIG. 50 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the game control board 100 side in the pachinko gaming machine PY1. As shown in FIG. 50, various actuators connected to the game control board 100 include a first AT solenoid 14s, a second AT solenoid 15s, and a distribution solenoid 16s.

The game control board 100 sends signals for controlling the driving of the first AT solenoid 14s, the second AT solenoid 15s, and the distribution solenoid 16s to each of the first AT solenoid 14s, the second AT solenoid 15s, and the distribution solenoid 16s. It is possible to output The first AT solenoid 14s is connected to the first AT opening/closing member 14k, and when the first AT solenoid 14s is driven, the first AT opening/closing member 14k performs an opening/closing operation. The second AT solenoid 15s is connected to the second AT opening/closing member 15k, and when the second AT solenoid 15s is driven, the second AT opening/closing member 15k performs an opening/closing operation. The distribution solenoid 16s is connected to the distribution member 16k, and the distribution member 16k moves forward and backward with respect to the front surface of the game board 1 when the distribution solenoid 16s is driven.

In addition, as various sensors connected to the game control board 100, a first big winning hole sensor 14a, a second big winning hole sensor 15a, and a specific area sensor 16a are connected to the game control board 100 so that they can output signals. ing. The first big winning hole sensor 14a can detect a game ball that has entered the first big winning hole 14, and when it detects a game ball, it sends a signal indicating that the game ball has entered the first big winning hole 14. Output to the control board 100. The second big winning hole sensor 15a can detect a game ball that has entered the second big winning hole 15, and when it detects a game ball, it sends a signal indicating that the game ball has entered the second big winning hole 15. Output to the control board 100. The specific area sensor 16a can detect a game ball that has passed through the specific area 16, and when it detects a game ball, it outputs a signal to the game control board 100 indicating that the game ball has passed through the specific area 16 (V winning). do.

Next, the game states that can be controlled by the pachinko game machine PY1 will be explained. In the pachinko gaming machine PY1, only one type of normal probability state is set as a gaming state related to the probability of winning a jackpot in jackpot determination. On the other hand, as the gaming states related to the winning ease of the second starting opening 12, a non-time saving state (low base state) and a time saving state (high base state) are set, as in the basic embodiment. Therefore, hereinafter, the low probability low base gaming state may be referred to as the "normal gaming state", and the low probability high base gaming state may be simply referred to as the "time saving state".

In addition, the pachinko game machine PY1, in the normal gaming state, shoots the game ball from the left with the aim of making the game ball land in the first starting hole 11 in order to make it land in the first starting hole 11. It is configured so that it is easier to continue firing the game ball with a right-handed shot so as to cause the second starting hole 12 to win a prize. Furthermore, in the normal gaming state, rather than aiming to make the game ball land in the second starting hole 12 by continuously firing the game ball by hitting right and making it win in the second starting hole 12, it is more likely that the game ball will land in the first starting hole 11. It is configured so that it is easier to continue firing the game ball with a left-handed hit while aiming at the ball to win the prize in the first starting hole 11.

Next, jackpot determination according to the first embodiment will be explained. An example of the configuration of the jackpot determination table referred to in the jackpot determination according to the first embodiment is shown in FIG. 51(A). As shown in FIG. 51(A), as a jackpot judgment table, a jackpot judgment table (first jackpot judgment table) related to special drawing 1 used in jackpot judgment (first jackpot judgment) based on winning in the first starting opening 11 is used. ) and a jackpot judgment table (second jackpot judgment table) related to the special drawings 2 used in jackpot judgment (second jackpot judgment) based on winnings in the second starting opening 12.

According to the first jackpot determination table, in the first jackpot determination, it is determined that the game is a jackpot or a loss. On the other hand, according to the second jackpot determination table, in the second jackpot determination, a jackpot, a small win, or a loss is determined. As will be described later, when a small hit is determined in the second jackpot determination, a stop display of the special figure 2 in a manner that finally indicates a small win is executed on the special figure 2 variable display (a predetermined result of "small win" is displayed). is derived), and a small winning game is executed according to the stop display. Then, when the game ball that has entered the second big prize opening 15 in the small winning game passes through the specific area 16, the big winning game is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 51(A), in the first jackpot determination, the probability of being determined to be a jackpot is set to 1/319. On the other hand, in the second jackpot determination, the probability of determining a jackpot is set to 1/319, and the probability of determining a small win is set to 10/319. As in the basic embodiment, in each jackpot judgment table, the judgment value of the special symbol random number (special symbol random number judgment value) is shown in FIG. 51(A) for the jackpot judgment result, small win, and loss. They are distributed appropriately to achieve the selectivity shown. However, the jackpot selection rate and the small win selection rate are not particularly limited and can be changed as appropriate. Further, in the first jackpot determination, a small win may be included as a jackpot determination result. Alternatively, in the second jackpot determination, the jackpot determination result may not include a jackpot.

Next, the jackpot symbol and the small prize symbol according to the first embodiment will be explained. As mentioned above, the jackpot symbol is a special symbol that indicates the type of jackpot as well as the jackpot win. The jackpot symbol is determined by jackpot symbol type determination, and the jackpot symbol type determination is performed using a jackpot symbol type determination table. A configuration example of the jackpot symbol type determination table according to the first embodiment is shown in FIG. 51(B).

As shown in FIG. 51(B), two types of jackpot symbols, a jackpot symbol A and a jackpot symbol B, are provided as the jackpot symbols of the special drawing 1. According to the jackpot symbol type determination table related to special drawing 1, jackpot symbol A is selected with a probability of 50%, and jackpot symbol B is selected with a probability of 50%. In addition, one type of jackpot symbol, jackpot symbol C, is provided as the jackpot symbol of special drawing 2. According to the jackpot symbol type determination table related to special figure 2, the jackpot symbol C is selected with a probability of 100%.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine PY1, there are two types of losing symbols related to special drawing 1: losing symbol A and losing symbol B, and one type of losing symbol related to special symbol 2 is losing symbol C. There is a losing pattern. The losing pattern A is in the same position as the losing pattern related to the special figure 1 in the basic embodiment, and has the same function in terms of specifications. On the other hand, the losing symbol B and the losing symbol C are losing symbols that shift the gaming state related to the ease of winning into the second start opening 12 to a second time-saving state, which will be described later. That is, when the stop display of the losing symbol B is performed in the special figure 1 variable display, the second time saving state is directly entered without the jackpot game being executed. Moreover, when the stop display of the losing symbol C is performed in the special figure 2 variable display, the second time saving state is directly entered without the jackpot game being executed. However, as will be described later, when the stop display of losing symbol B and losing symbol C is performed and the jackpot game is not executed and the second time saving state is entered, it is while staying in the normal gaming state. This is only the case when the losing symbol B or the losing symbol C is stopped and displayed. Even if the losing pattern B and the losing pattern C are stopped and displayed in a time saving state such as a first time saving state and a second time saving state which will be described later, the second time saving state will not be entered.

When the game control microcomputer 101 of the pachinko game machine PY1 determines a loss in the jackpot determination, it determines the type of the losing symbol by determining the type of losing symbol. Loss symbol type determination is performed using a loss symbol type determination table. A configuration example of the losing symbol type determination table according to the first embodiment is shown in FIG. 51(C). As shown in FIG. 51(C), according to the losing symbol type determination table for special figure 1, losing symbol A is determined with a probability of 198/199, losing symbol B is determined with a probability of 1/199, and the losing symbol B is determined with a probability of 1/199. According to the losing symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 2, the losing symbol C is determined with a probability of 199/199.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the special figure 1 related determination information and the special figure 2 related determination information include losing symbols in addition to the above-mentioned special symbol random number, jackpot symbol type random number, reach random number, and special symbol variation pattern random number. It also includes a losing symbol type random number for determining the type. Therefore, a losing symbol type random number counter (label-TRND-HS) related to the losing symbol type random number is provided in a predetermined area of the gaming RAM 104, and the losing symbol type random number counter (label-TRND-HS) is specially Like the symbol random number counter (label-TRND-T) and the jackpot symbol type random number counter (label-TRND-OS), it is updated in the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003). Then, in step S218, the game control microcomputer 101 also acquires a losing symbol type random number as the special figure 1 related determination information, and stores it in the special figure related determination information buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104. In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 also acquires a losing symbol type random number as the special figure 2 related determination information in step S211, and stores it in the special figure related determination information buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104. Note that the range of the losing symbol type random number can be set as appropriate, but in the first embodiment, it is set to "0 to 199".

In the loss symbol type determination table, the determination value of the loss symbol type random number (the loss symbol type random number determination value) is set to the selection rate shown in FIG. 51(C) for the loss symbol type that is the result of the loss symbol type determination. They are distributed appropriately. Therefore, as will be described later, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 compares the acquired losing symbol type random number with the losing symbol type determination table to determine the type of losing symbol. Note that the number of losing symbol types and the selection rate of each losing symbol type are not limited to the first embodiment, and may be set as appropriate.

Next, a jackpot game according to the first embodiment will be explained. In the first embodiment, in the jackpot game, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, and in the small win game that is executed after the small win symbol is stopped and displayed, the game ball that has won the second jackpot 15 opened is It is executed when the specific area 16 is passed (V winning). The jackpot game components constituting the jackpot game, in other words, the jackpot game control table for controlling the jackpot game, determine the type of the special symbol that is stopped and displayed, in detail, the jackpot symbol that is the trigger for executing the jackpot game. It is associated with the type and the type of small winning symbol. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the jackpot game control table according to the first embodiment.

Note that even if the small winning symbols are stopped and displayed, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area 16 in the small winning game, the jackpot game will not be executed. Therefore, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the direct trigger for executing the jackpot game is when the game ball passes through the specific area 16 (V winning), but the game ball does not enter the second big winning opening 15. and the game ball cannot pass through the specific area 16, winning the second grand prize opening 15 can be achieved by opening the second grand prize opening 15, and opening the second major prize opening 15 is a small hit. Since it is executed as a game, the stop display of small winning symbols is also included in the trigger for executing the jackpot game.

Furthermore, in the following, the stop display of the small winning symbol is referred to as "hitting a small hit/becoming a small hit", and the stopping display of a jackpot symbol and the game ball passing through the specific area 16 are referred to as "hitting a jackpot". It is sometimes called "It's going to be a big hit."

As shown in FIG. 52, the jackpot game associated with jackpot symbol A (hereinafter also referred to as "first jackpot game"), and the jackpot game associated with jackpot symbol B (hereinafter also referred to as "second jackpot game"). ), and the round game related to the jackpot game (hereinafter also referred to as "third jackpot game") associated with the jackpot symbol C is executed 10 times.

Further, the number of times the round game related to the jackpot game (hereinafter also referred to as "fourth jackpot game") associated with the small winning symbol is executed is 10 times. In addition, the fourth jackpot game is a small win game (hereinafter also referred to as "small win game") that is executed by stopping display of the small win symbol, and when the game ball passes through the specific area 16, the small win game ends. It is executed according to what you want to do.

Further, in the first embodiment, the jackpot game component also includes the type of jackpot opening to be opened. As shown in FIG. 52, the first jackpot 14 is set to open in all round games of all jackpot games, regardless of the special symbol type. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 52, regardless of the special symbol type, for all round games of all jackpot games, the number of openings of the first big prize opening 14 in the round game is set to one, and for each opening. The relevant time (opening time) is set to 29.5 seconds, and the time required for closing after opening (closing time) is set to 2.0 seconds. Note that the closing time is not set for the last round game in each jackpot game. This is because after the opening of the first grand prize opening 14 related to the last round game ends, an ending is performed in which the first grand prize opening 14 is kept closed.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the opening time ("OP time" in FIG. 52) of all jackpot games is set to 10.0 seconds, and the ending time ("OP time" in FIG. 52) of all jackpot games is set to 10.0 seconds, regardless of the special symbol type. The "ED time") is set to 10.0 seconds.

Note that the specific values related to the jackpot game components are not particularly limited and may be changed as appropriate. For example, the opening time and ending time may be different depending on the gaming state when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. Further, the types of the big winning holes 14 and 15 to be opened may be different depending on the order of the round games. Furthermore, depending on the order of the round games, the number of times the big winning holes 14, 15 are opened, the total time that the big winning holes 14, 15 are open in the round game, and the closing of the big winning holes 14, 15 after opening. The relevant time (closing time) may be different. Furthermore, the number of times the round game is executed in the jackpot game and the total time during which the jackpot openings 14 and 15 can be opened may vary depending on the type of the small winning symbol.

Next, a small winning game according to the first embodiment will be explained. The pachinko game machine PY1 controls the opening and closing of the big prize openings 14 and 15 in the small winning game using the small winning game control table. In the first embodiment, the small winning game control table can be set in association with the gaming state when the small winning symbol that is the trigger for the small winning game is stopped and displayed (gaming state at the time of small winning). It is possible.

The small winning game control table stores elements (small winning game constituent elements) constituting a small winning game, especially regarding opening and closing of the large winning openings 14 and 15. The small winning game components include the type of big winning opening to be opened, the number of openings of the big winning opening in the small winning game, the time required for each opening (opening time), the time to be closed until the next opening (closing time), It includes the opening time (opening time), the ending time (ending time), etc. That is, the small winning game component is associated with the small winning game state. FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the small winning game control table according to the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 53, the small win game control table is associated with the small win game state. In other words, there is a small winning game control table (normal small winning game control table) used when small winning symbols are stopped and displayed during the normal gaming state, and a small winning symbol is used when the small winning symbols are stopped and displayed during the time saving state. There is a small winning game control table used for (time saving small winning game control table).

In addition, below, the small winning game that is controlled and executed using the normal small winning game control table is referred to as the "normal small winning game", and the small winning game that is controlled and executed using the time saving small winning game control table. The small winning game is called a "time saving small winning game".

As shown in FIG. 53, the second large prize opening 15 is opened once in all small winning games. The opening time of the second large prize opening 15 in each small winning game is 1.8 seconds. Further, the opening time of the normal small winning game is 10.0 seconds, and the ending time is 1.0 seconds. On the other hand, the opening time of the time-saving small winning game is 2.0 seconds, and the ending time is 2.0 seconds.

Here, details of the small winning game will be explained using FIG. 54. FIG. 54(A) is a time chart showing the flow of the normal small winning game, and FIG. 54(B) is a time chart showing the flow of the time saving small winning game.

As shown in FIG. 54(A), when the "small winning symbol" is stopped and displayed as the stop display of the special figure 2 in the normal game state, the normal small winning game is played. Then, in response to the start of the normal small winning game, an opening (normal small winning OP) in which the second large prize opening 15 is kept closed is performed. The normal small win OP continues until 10.0 seconds have passed after the start of the normal small win game, and when the normal small win OP ends, the second large prize opening 15 is opened (the normal small win is opened). At the same time, the distribution member 16k is retracted and enters the first passing state. The normal small win release continues until 1.8 seconds have passed after the start of the release or until 10 game balls enter the second big prize opening 15, while the retraction of the distribution member 16k This evacuation continues until 2.8 seconds have elapsed after the start of the evacuation. Then, when the normal small winning opening ends, an ending (normal small winning ED) is performed in which the second large prize opening 15 is closed and the closed state is maintained. The normal small win ED continues until 2.0 seconds have passed after the start of the ED, and the normal small win game ends when the normal small win ED ends.

As shown in FIG. 54(B), when the "small winning symbol" is stopped and displayed as the stop display of the special drawing 2 in the time saving state, the time saving small winning game is played. Then, in response to the start of the time-saving small winning game, an opening (time-saving small winning OP) is performed in which the second large prize opening 15 is initially kept in a closed state. The time-saving small win OP continues until 2.0 seconds have passed after the start of the time-saving small win game, and when the time-saving small win OP ends, the second big prize opening 15 is opened (the time-saving small win is released). At the same time, the distribution member 16k is retracted and enters the first passing state. The time-saving small win release continues until 1.8 seconds have passed after the start of the release or until 10 game balls enter the second big prize opening 15, while the retraction of the distribution member 16k This evacuation continues until 2.8 seconds have elapsed after the start of the evacuation. Then, when the time-saving small win opening is completed, an ending (time-saving small win ED) is performed in which the second big prize opening 15 is closed and the closed state is maintained. The time-saving small win ED continues until 2.0 seconds have passed after the start of the ED, and the time-saving small win game ends when the time-saving small win ED ends.

During the normal small winning game and the time-saving small winning game, the game ball that enters the second large prize opening 15 flows down to the non-specific area 17 because the distribution member 16k is in the retracted position in the first passing state. On the other hand, in the second passing state, since the distribution member 16k is in the advanced position, it flows down on the distribution member 16k and passes through the non-specific area 17. Then, when the game ball passes through the specific area 16, a jackpot game corresponding to the small winning symbol type is performed in accordance with the end of the small winning game.

In addition, in both the normal small winning game and the time-saving small winning game, while the second big winning opening 15 is open, and until 1.0 seconds have passed after the second big winning opening 15 is closed. During this period, the distribution member 16k is retracted (the first passage state is maintained), and the game ball is in a state where it can pass through the specific area 16 (V winning). Then, in both the normal small winning game and the time-saving small winning game, the pachinko game machine PY1 starts firing the game ball by hitting right after the small winning game starts, and then starts firing the game ball in the small winning game. Basically, if the ball is fired right-handed, the game ball is basically configured to pass through the specific area 16 (V winning) (unless there is a particular problem). Also, when a game ball enters the second grand prize opening 15 (wins a prize) during a small winning game, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls regardless of whether the game ball passes through the specific area 16 or not. It will be done.

Next, the gaming state according to the first embodiment will be explained. In the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the first embodiment, the gaming states related to the ease of winning in the second starting opening 12 include a non-time-saving state (normal gaming state) that constitutes the normal gaming state, and a non-time-saving state (normal gaming state) that constitutes the normal gaming state. There is a time-saving state in which it is easy to win a prize in the second starting port 12, but the time-saving state further includes a first time-saving state and a second time-saving state in which it is less easy to win in the second starting port 12 than in the first time-saving state. There is a time saving situation. The first time saving state is the same as the time saving state according to the basic embodiment. In other words, the probability of being determined to be a hit in the first time saving state is 59937/65536, the normal figure fluctuation time related to the first time saving state is 5 seconds, and the auxiliary game related to the second time saving state is 59937/65536. The opening pattern of the second starting port 12 is two openings for 2.5 seconds with an interval of 1.0 seconds in between.

In the second time-saving state, the ease of winning a prize in the second starting port 12 is lower than in the non-time-saving state, but the ease of winning in the second starting port 12 is lower in the non-time-saving state than in the first time-saving state. close. Specifically, the second time-saving state is infinitely closer to the non-time-saving state (normal gaming state) than the first time-saving state in terms of ease of winning into the second starting opening 12. Here, a configuration example of the hit determination table according to the first embodiment is shown in FIG. 55(A), a configuration example of the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table according to the first embodiment is shown in FIG. 55(B), A configuration example of the auxiliary game control table according to the embodiment is shown in FIG. 55(C).

As shown in FIGS. 55(A), 55(B), and 55(C), the probability of being determined to be a hit in the non-time saving state is 6601/65536, and The normal figure fluctuation time is 30 seconds, and the opening pattern of the second starting port 12 in the auxiliary game related to the non-time saving state is one opening for 0.2 seconds, whereas in the second time saving state The probability of being determined to be a hit in the hit determination is 6701/65536, the normal figure fluctuation time related to the second time saving state is 25 seconds, and the opening of the second starting port 12 in the auxiliary game related to the second time saving state. The pattern is one 0.5 second opening. In this way, the ease of winning a prize in the second starting port 12, in other words, the factors that make up the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time, specifically, the probability of winning in the winning judgment, the Regarding both the figure fluctuation time and the opening time of the second starting port 12 in the auxiliary game, the second time saving state is much closer to the non-time saving state than the first time saving state. Therefore, in the second time saving state, the pachinko game machine PY1 fires the game ball by hitting the right hand aiming at the second starting port 12, as in the non-time saving state (normal gaming state). Rather than winning a prize, it is easier to aim at the first starting hole 11 and shoot a game ball with a left-handed hit to make the first starting hole 11 win a prize.

Next, the game states to which the pachinko game machine PY1 newly transitions upon completion of the jackpot game, and the termination conditions related to each game state will be explained. In the first embodiment, when the jackpot game is executed based on the stop display of the jackpot symbol, the game state to which the jackpot game is newly transitioned upon completion of the jackpot game, and the ending conditions for each game state are as follows: It is associated with the gaming state when the symbol is stopped and displayed and the corresponding jackpot symbol type. On the other hand, when the jackpot game is executed based on the passing of the game ball through the specific area 16 (V winning), the game state to which the jackpot game is newly transitioned and the ending conditions related to each game state are , is associated with the game state when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, and the small winning symbol type.

As will be described later, when the small winning symbols are stopped and displayed, the small winning game is started while the game state at that time is maintained. Therefore, the gaming state when the small winning symbols are stopped and displayed is the same as the gaming state when the game ball passes through the specific area 16 (V winning), in other words, when the jackpot is won. In other words, when the jackpot game is executed based on the passing of the game ball through the specific area 16, the game state to which the jackpot game is newly transitioned upon the end of the jackpot game, and the ending conditions for each game state are as follows: It is associated with the current gaming state and the corresponding small winning symbol type. Therefore, regardless of whether the trigger for a jackpot game is the stop display of a jackpot symbol or the stop display of a small win symbol, the game state that will be newly transitioned to when the jackpot game ends, and the ending conditions for each game state are as follows: It can be said that it is associated with the gaming state when a jackpot is achieved and the type of special symbol that triggers the occurrence of the jackpot game.

Figure 56 (A) shows the type of special symbol (special symbol type) that triggers the occurrence of the jackpot game when a jackpot is hit in the normal gaming state, and the transition that occurs when the jackpot game corresponding to the special symbol type ends. 56(B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a gaming state setting table representing a relationship between a gaming state and an end condition related to the gaming state, and FIG. ), the type of special symbol that triggers the occurrence of the jackpot game (special symbol type), the gaming state that will change with the end of the jackpot game corresponding to the special symbol type, and the gaming state. It is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a gaming state setting table showing the relationship with the end condition.

As shown in FIG. 56(A), when the special symbol types that trigger the occurrence of a jackpot in the normal gaming state are jackpot symbol A, jackpot symbol B, jackpot symbol C, and small win symbol, the corresponding With the end of the jackpot games (first jackpot game, second jackpot game, third jackpot game, and fourth jackpot game) corresponding to the special symbol type, the game shifts to the first time saving state. An end condition is set for this first time saving state. In the case of jackpot symbol A, jackpot symbol B, jackpot symbol C, and small prize symbol, the end condition is that the special pattern 2 variable display is executed 50 times. Therefore, in the normal game state, the jackpot symbol A, the jackpot symbol B, and the jackpot symbol C are stopped and displayed, and then the first time saving state shifts to the end of the jackpot game that is executed, and the small win symbol in the normal gaming state. The first time-saving state transitions to when the game ball that enters the second big prize opening 15 in the small winning game that is executed after it is stopped and displayed passes through the specific area 16 and the jackpot game that is executed is finished. , it is possible to continue until the special figure 2 variable display is executed 50 times without executing the jackpot game. That is, the prescribed number of times in the first time-saving state (the prescribed number of time-savings) that is transferred with the end of the jackpot game executed by the stop display of the jackpot symbol A, the jackpot symbol B, and the jackpot symbol C in the normal game state, and A small winning game that is executed when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the normal gaming state and the game ball that has won the second big prize opening 15 passes through the specific area 16, which is transferred to the second jackpot game that is executed when the jackpot game ends. The predetermined number of times of one time saving state (prescribed number of time saving times) is 50 times.

As shown in FIG. 56(B), when a jackpot occurs in the time saving state (first time saving state and second time saving state), the types of special symbols that trigger the occurrence of the jackpot are jackpot symbol A, jackpot symbol B, jackpot In the case of symbol C and a small winning symbol, the first time reduction occurs with the end of the jackpot game (first jackpot game, second jackpot game, third jackpot game, fourth jackpot game) corresponding to the special symbol type. transition to state. An end condition is set for this first time saving state. However, the conditions for ending the first time saving state differ depending on the special symbol type. Specifically, the end condition of the first time-saving state regarding the jackpot symbol A, the jackpot symbol C, and the small prize symbol is that the special figure 2 variable display is executed 50 times. On the other hand, the end condition of the first time saving state related to the jackpot symbol B is constituted by the special figure 2 variable display being executed 10 times. Therefore, in the time saving state, the jackpot symbol A and the jackpot symbol C are stopped and displayed, and then the jackpot game is executed. In the first time-saving state, the game ball that won the second big prize opening 15 in the small winning game passes through the specific area 16 and shifts to the first time saving state with the end of the jackpot game, in which the jackpot game is executed. It is possible to continue until the special figure 2 variable display is executed 50 times without any trouble. That is, the prescribed number of times in the first time saving state (prescribed time saving number) that is transferred upon the end of the jackpot game executed by the stop display of the jackpot symbol A and the jackpot symbol C in the time saving state, and the small win in the time saving state. The predetermined number of times the first time-saving state is entered upon the end of the jackpot game that is executed when the game ball that enters the second big prize opening 15 passes through the specific area 16 in the small win game that is executed when the symbols are stopped and displayed. (Specified number of times to save time) is 50 times. On the other hand, in the first time-saving state, which transitions to the end of the jackpot game that is executed after the jackpot symbol B is stopped and displayed in the time-saving state, the special figure 2 variable display is executed 10 times without the jackpot game being executed. It is possible to continue until the end of the project. That is, the prescribed number of times in the first time saving state (the prescribed number of time saving times) to which the first time saving state is transferred upon completion of the jackpot game executed by the stop display of the jackpot symbol B in the time saving state is 10 times.

By the way, in the pachinko game machine PY1, the first time saving state may be entered due to an occurrence trigger different from a jackpot. The occurrence trigger other than this jackpot is that the special symbol variable display is executed a specific number of times without hitting the jackpot after the state is newly shifted to the normal probability state. In the case of a new transition to the normal probability state, as described later, a RAM clear switch (not shown) is operated when power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 (when the power is turned on), and the normal gaming state is set. In some cases, the state is shifted to the first time saving state in response to the end of the jackpot game. The trigger for the occurrence of this first time saving state is referred to as "reaching the ceiling." Note that the first time saving state that occurs due to a jackpot is referred to as "jackpot time saving", and the first time saving state that occurs due to reaching the ceiling is referred to as "ceiling time saving". Further, the specific number of times that the special figure variable display related to ceiling time saving is executed is sometimes referred to as "ceiling", and in the first embodiment, the specific number of times related to ceiling time saving is set to 1200 times.

In addition, the condition for ending the ceiling time reduction is that the special map 2 variable display is executed 50 times without hitting the jackpot. That is, the ceiling time reduction can be continued until the special figure 2 variable display is executed 50 times without hitting the jackpot, and the prescribed number of time reductions related to the ceiling time reduction is 50 times.

In this way, including the jackpot time saving, the specified number of time saving times in the time saving state is 50 times and 10 times. In the following, a time-saving state in which the prescribed number of time-savings is 50 times may be referred to as an "advantageous time-saving state", and a time-saving state in which the prescribed number of time-savings is 10 times may be referred to as a "disadvantageous time-saving state".

Further, in the pachinko game machine PY1, the second time saving state may be entered due to an occurrence trigger different from a jackpot. The trigger for this occurrence other than the jackpot is that the losing symbol B or the losing symbol C is stopped and displayed in the normal gaming state. In the following, the trigger for the occurrence of this second time-saving state may be referred to as an "emergency." Further, the second time-saving state that occurs due to an unexpected situation is sometimes referred to as "lost time-saving".

Further, in the first embodiment, the end condition for shortening the losing time is that the special symbol variable display is executed 1200 times without hitting the jackpot. That is, the loss time reduction can be continued until the special figure variable display is executed 1200 times without hitting the jackpot, and the prescribed number of time reductions related to the loss time reduction is 1200 times.

In addition, in the first embodiment, even if the losing pattern B or the losing pattern C is stopped and displayed in the time saving state (the first time saving state and the second time saving state), the time saving state is maintained and the time saving state is maintained. The remaining number of time savings related to the state is also maintained (does not change).

Next, the main game flow in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be explained. FIG. 57 is a diagram schematically showing the main game flow in the pachinko gaming machine PY1. In addition, below, the stop display of the jackpot symbol A and the execution of the first jackpot game with the jackpot symbol A being stopped and displayed may be referred to as "jackpot 1." Similarly, "Jackpot 2" and "Jackpot 2" indicate that the jackpot symbol B and the jackpot symbol C are stopped and displayed, and that the jackpot symbol B and the jackpot symbol C are stopped and displayed and the second jackpot game and the third jackpot game are executed. It is sometimes called "Jackpot 3". Furthermore, in the small winning game based on the stop display of the small winning symbol, the game ball that entered the second big prize opening 15 passes through the specific area 16, and after the passage, the fourth jackpot game is executed. It is sometimes referred to as 4. Furthermore, the fact that losing symbols B and C are stopped and displayed, and the losing symbols B and C being stopped and displayed and moving to the second time-saving game may also be referred to as "losing B" and "losing C". be.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in the first embodiment, when a RAM clear switch (not shown) is operated when power is supplied to the pachinko game machine PY1, the game control microcomputer 101 changes the game state to In addition to setting the normal game state (low probability low base game state), the performance control microcomputer 121 sets the normal performance mode (suggesting the normal game state or the second time saving state) according to the left-handed hit as the performance mode. Set. Note that if the RAM clear switch (not shown) is not operated when power is supplied to the pachinko game machine PY1, the game control microcomputer 101 will assume the gaming state and change the state of the power at the time of the previous power supply interruption (power outage). The game state is taken over as it is, and the performance control microcomputer 121 takes over as the performance mode the performance mode at the time of the previous interruption of power supply (power outage).

In the normal game state, which is a non-time-saving state, the game is mainly played in which a game ball is launched with a left-handed hit to win a prize into the first starting slot 11, and the player aims to win a jackpot in the special drawing 1 lottery based on the prize. . When the special figure 1 lottery is executed, the special figure 1 variable display is executed. When a jackpot is won in the special pattern 1 lottery, the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed in the special pattern 1 variable display, and the jackpot pattern related to the special pattern 1 includes a jackpot pattern A and a jackpot pattern B.

When the jackpot symbol A is stopped and displayed in the normal game state, the first jackpot game is executed (Jackpot 1), and with the end of the first jackpot game, the first time saving state (where the prescribed number of time saving times is 50 times) ( The first advantageous time saving state) is entered, and the production mode corresponding to the first advantageous time saving state is entered. In the first embodiment, the production mode corresponding to the first advantageous time saving state may be referred to as "time saving RUSH". In addition, when the stop display of the jackpot symbol B is performed in the normal game state, a second jackpot game is executed (jackpot 2), and with the end of the second jackpot game, the first time saver with a prescribed number of time savers of 50 times. state (first advantageous time-saving state), and a production mode (time-saving RUSH) corresponding to the first advantageous time-saving state. That is, in the first embodiment, in the normal game state, when the jackpot symbol A is stopped and displayed, and when the jackpot symbol B is stopped and displayed, a jackpot game of 10R is executed, and in response to the end of the jackpot game. A transition is made to a first time saving state (advantageous first time saving state) in which the prescribed number of time saving times is 50 times. In other words, in the normal gaming state, the gaming profit for the player is the same when the jackpot symbol A is stopped and displayed and when the jackpot symbol B is stopped and displayed.

Also, for example, when the RAM clear switch (shown in the figure) is operated when power is supplied, the normal gaming state and normal production mode are set, and in the normal gaming state and normal production mode, the special figure variable display is specified without hitting the jackpot. When the number of times (1200 times) is executed, the ceiling is reached and the specified number of time savings is 50 times (advantageous first time saving state). At the same time, the performance mode (time saving RUSH).

In the advantageous first time-saving state, which is the first time-saving state, it is possible to win the prize in the second starting port 12 by firing the game ball with the right hand, and in the normal gaming state, continue to fire the game ball with the left hand. It is configured so that it is easier to continue firing the game ball by hitting right in the first time saving state and win a prize in the second starting hole 12 than to win a prize in the first starting hole 11. Since the result of the special drawing 2 lottery is more likely to be advantageous to the player than that of the special drawing 2 lottery, in the advantageous first time saving state, basically the prize is entered into the second starting opening 12, and the special drawing 2 lottery based on the winning is made. Games are mainly played in which the aim is to win a jackpot or a small jackpot. However, the probability of winning a jackpot in the second jackpot determination is 1/319, and the probability of winning a small jackpot is 10/319, so in the advantageous first time saving state, realistically, the second start The game is mainly played with the aim of winning a prize in the mouth 12, winning a small prize in the special drawing 2 lottery based on the winning prize, and winning a big prize.

When the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the first advantageous time saving state and the time saving RUSH, the time saving small winning game is executed. As mentioned above, in the pachinko game machine PY1, if you continue to fire the game ball by hitting right in the time-saving small winning game, the game ball will basically pass through the specific area 16 (unless something extraordinary happens). It is configured so that you can win a prize (V). Then, when the game ball that has entered the second big prize opening 15 in the time-saving small winning game passes through the specific area 16, a fourth big winning game is executed in accordance with the end of the time-saving small winning game (big win 4). Here, since the stop display of the small winning symbol was made in the time saving state, with the end of the fourth jackpot game, the first time saving state where the prescribed number of time saving times is 50 times (advantageous first time saving state) At the same time, the production mode (time saving RUSH) corresponding to the first advantageous time saving state is set. That is, through the jackpot 4, the advantageous first time-saving state and the time-saving RUSH continue (consecutive wins).

When the stop display of the jackpot symbol C is performed in the first advantageous time saving state and the time saving RUSH, a third jackpot game is executed (jackpot 3). Here, since the stop display of the jackpot symbol C was made in the time saving state, with the end of the third jackpot game, the first time saving state (advantageous first time saving state) where the prescribed number of time saving times is 50 is again performed. At the same time, the production mode (time saving RUSH) corresponding to the first advantageous time saving state is set. That is, through the jackpot 3, the advantageous first time-saving state and the time-saving RUSH continue (consecutive wins).

Further, in the normal game state and the normal performance mode, when the losing symbol B is stopped and displayed in the special symbol 1 variable display, the second time saving state is directly entered without the jackpot game being executed. Here, as mentioned above, the second time saving state is a gaming state very similar to the normal gaming state, so even in the second time saving state, basically the game ball is fired left-handed and the first starting port 11 is A game is played in which the player aims to win a jackpot with the variable display of special drawing 1 based on winnings. Therefore, even when switching from the normal gaming state to the second time saving state, the operation mode for firing the game ball continues as a left-handed hit.

Note that in the first embodiment, the performance in the normal performance mode is executed even in the second time saving state. That is, even if the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state to the second time saving state due to the stop display of the losing symbol B, the performance mode is not changed. Furthermore, when switching from the normal game state to the second time saving state, the suggestion and notification of the switching is not executed, and the performance in the normal performance mode continues without interruption. Therefore, even when the normal gaming state shifts to the second time saving state, the player feels as if the normal gaming state continues or as if the gaming state has not changed.

When the stop display of the jackpot symbol A is performed in the second time saving state, the first jackpot game is executed (jackpot 1), and with the end of the first jackpot game, the first time saving state where the prescribed number of time savings is 50 times. (first advantageous time saving state), and the production mode corresponding to the first advantageous time saving state is set. On the other hand, when the stop display of the jackpot symbol B is performed in the second time saving state, the second jackpot game is executed (jackpot 2), but the game state when the stop display of the jackpot symbol B is performed is Since the game is in a time saving state (time saving state), upon completion of the second jackpot game, the first time saving state (unfavorable first time saving state) is entered in which the prescribed number of time saving times is 10 times. That is, in the second time saving state, the jackpot game of 10R is executed both when the jackpot symbol A is stopped and displayed and when the jackpot symbol B is stopped and displayed, but in the case of the jackpot symbol A, the jackpot game ends. In response to this, the game shifts to a first time saving state where the prescribed number of time savings is 50 times, while in the case of jackpot symbol B, the game shifts to a first time saving state where the prescribed number of time savings is 10 times in response to the end of the jackpot game. In other words, in the second time saving state, when jackpot symbol A is stopped and displayed and when jackpot symbol B is stopped and displayed, the gaming profit for the player, specifically, the game profit after the jackpot game is increased. The duration of the 1-hour short state is different. In addition, in the first embodiment, when the specified number of time reductions becomes the first time reduction state (unfavorable first time reduction state) with the end of the second jackpot game, the production mode is set to the first disadvantageous first time reduction state. The production mode will change depending on the time saving situation. In the first embodiment, the production mode corresponding to the disadvantageous first time saving state may be referred to as "chance time".

In the jackpot determination based on winning in the second starting opening 12, which is the main target of the game in the first time saving state, the probability of being determined to be a jackpot is 1/319, and the probability of being determined to be a small win is 10/319. , unless there is an extreme case, it is possible to win a V prize in a small winning game, so the probability of being judged as a jackpot in the second jackpot determination is the probability of being judged as a jackpot and the probability of being judged as a small win. The sum is 1/29. Then, the prescribed number of time savings related to the first advantageous time saving state is 50 times, and the probability of being judged as a jackpot in the second jackpot determination is greater than the denominator, so it is possible to win the jackpot in the advantageous first time saving state. You can have expectations for it. On the other hand, the prescribed number of time savings in the first disadvantageous time saving state is 10 times, which is smaller than the denominator of the probability of being judged as a jackpot in the second jackpot determination, so it is possible to win a jackpot in the first disadvantageous time saving state. I can't have any expectations for that. In other words, in the first advantageous time-saving state, there is a high possibility of being able to win consecutive games (the expectation for consecutive winnings is relatively high), but in the unfavorable first time-saving state, the possibility of successive winnings is low (the expectation level for consecutive winnings is relatively high). relatively low).

In this way, in the normal game state and the second time saving state, while the normal performance mode is being performed in the same way, a left-handed game is performed, but if you win a jackpot in the normal game state, you will receive 100%. The probability is that the game will shift to the first advantageous time saving state, while if it wins a jackpot in the second time saving state, it will shift to the advantageous first time saving state with a probability of 50%.

Further, although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in the first embodiment, in the first time saving state, the special figure 2 variable display is displayed the prescribed number of times (50 times in the advantageous first time saving state, 50 times in the unfavorable first time saving state) without hitting the jackpot. 10 times), when the specified number of times of time saving (50th time in the first advantageous time saving state, 10th time in the disadvantageous first time saving state) special chart 2 fluctuation display ends, in other words, the special chart 2 stops. When the display starts, the first time saving state ends and the gaming state newly shifts to the normal gaming state. Then, after the variable display of special pattern 2 ends, in other words, when the special pattern confirmation time elapses after the stop display of special pattern 2 starts, if the one that is stopped and displayed is the losing pattern C, then Since this is the normal gaming state, the stop display of the losing symbol C changes the normal gaming state to the second time saving state (sudden state). Therefore, in the first time saving state, if the special figure 2 variable display is executed the prescribed number of times (50 times in the advantageous first time saving state, 10 times in the unfavorable first time saving state) without hitting the jackpot, in effect, At the same time as the first time-saving state shifts to the second time-saving state, the game ball launch mode changes from right-handed to left-handed (returns to left-handed). In the following, in the first time saving state, the special figure 2 variable display is executed the prescribed number of times (50 times in the advantageous first time saving state, 10 times in the disadvantageous second time saving state) without hitting the jackpot, and the first time saving state is When the game ends and the gaming state shifts to the second time saving state, this is referred to as "first time saving exit". Then, in response to the first time-saving omission, the performance mode shifts from the performance mode (time-saving RUSH in the advantageous first time-saving state, chance time in the disadvantageous first time-saving state) to the normal performance mode.

Note that, as described above, the pachinko game machine PY1 is configured so that a player can easily win a prize in the second starting port 12 by continuing to shoot the game ball by hitting right. Therefore, in the advantageous first time saving state, when the special figure 2 variable display is being performed, if you continue to fire the game ball by hitting right, the special figure 2 pending will accumulate up to the upper limit (4). Become. Therefore, just before the first time reduction state ends (immediately after the first time reduction exit), special map 2 reservations have accumulated up to the upper limit (4), and in the second time reduction state immediately after the first time reduction exit, the first time reduction state is The special figure 2 variable display based on those special figure 2 reservations will be executed. In the following, when the second time saving state is entered immediately after the first time saving state, the special drawing 2 reservation remaining at the end of the first time saving state will be referred to as "remaining reservation".

In addition, in the first embodiment, in the second time saving state, when the special figure variable display is executed the specified number of time saving times (1200 times) without hitting the jackpot, the special figure variable display for the specified time saving number (1200th) is executed. It is conceivable that upon completion of the second time saving state, the second time saving state ends and the gaming state newly shifts to the normal gaming state. However, as routes for shifting to the second time saving state, there are two cases: a case where the losing symbol B is stopped and displayed in the normal gaming state, and a case where the first time saving state is eliminated. In the former case, the fact that the normal gaming state is maintained means that the ceiling has not been reached, so even if the game shifts to the second time-saving state, the remaining number of ceilings will be carried over. Then, since the specified number of time reductions related to the second time reduction state is greater than the specific number of times related to reaching the ceiling, if the special pattern variable display continues to be executed without hitting the jackpot in the second time reduction state, the second time reduction state On the way, the ceiling is reached and the second time saving state shifts to the first time saving state. In addition, in the latter case, since the first time-saving state that was triggered by the execution of the jackpot game has been transferred to the second time-saving state, at the time of transitioning to the second time-saving state, the remaining number of times at the ceiling is 50. In this case, if the special map variable display continues to be executed without hitting a jackpot in the second time-saving state, the ceiling will be reached in the middle of the second time-saving state, and the second time-saving state will change from the second time-saving state to the first one. This will result in a transition to a time saving state. In this way, in the second time saving state, the specified time saving number (1200th) special symbol variable display will not be executed, and if there is no jackpot, the ceiling will always be reached.

Next, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table and the special figure 1 variation pattern according to the first embodiment will be explained. The special figure 1 variation pattern determination table according to the first embodiment includes a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table used in the normal gaming state and a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table used in the time saving state (first time saving state and second time saving state). It is divided by the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table used. In the following, the special figure 1 moving pattern determination table used in the normal gaming state will be referred to as the "normal special figure 1 varying pattern determining table", and the special figure 1 varying pattern determining table used in the time saving state will be referred to as the "normal special figure 1 varying pattern determining table". is referred to as the "time-saving special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table". Here, an example of the structure of the normal special figure 1 variation pattern determination table is shown in FIG. 58, and a structure example of the time-saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table is shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 58, the normal special pattern 1 variation pattern determination table further includes a normal special pattern 1 variation pattern determination table associated with the special pattern lottery result "jackpot pattern A" and a special pattern lottery result "jackpot pattern A". The normal special symbol 1 variation pattern determination table associated with "Symbol B" and the regular special symbol associated with the special symbol lottery result "Loss symbol (Loss symbol A, Loss symbol B)" and the reach determination result "Reach available" There is a variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 1, and a normal special symbol 1 variation pattern determination table that is associated with the special symbol lottery result "losing symbol (losing symbol A, losing symbol B)" and the reach determination result "no reach". In the normal special pattern 1 variation pattern judgment table that is associated with the special pattern lottery result "losing pattern (losing pattern A, losing pattern B)" and the reach judgment result "no reach", the special pattern 1 pending number is 0. There are two types: one related to the case of ~2, and one related to the case where the number of reserved special drawings 1 is 3 to 4.

As shown in FIG. 59, the time-saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table includes the time-saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table associated with the special figure lottery result "jackpot symbol A" and the special figure lottery result "jackpot symbol B". '', the time-saving special figure 1 fluctuation pattern judgment table associated with the special figure lottery result ``losing symbol (losing symbol A, losing symbol B)'' and the reach determination result ``with reach'' There is a fluctuation pattern determination table and a time-saving special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table that is associated with the special figure lottery result "losing symbol (losing symbol A, losing symbol B)" and the reach determination result "no reach". In the time-saving special pattern 1 fluctuation pattern judgment table that is associated with the special drawing lottery result "losing symbol (losing symbol A, losing symbol B)" and the reach determination result "no reach", the number of reserved special symbols 1 is 0. There are two types: one related to the case of ~2, and one related to the case where the number of reserved special drawings 1 is 3 to 4.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 58, the special figure 1 fluctuation patterns that can be determined in the normal gaming state include THP01 to THP04, THP11 to THP12, and THP14 to THP16, and in the case of jackpot symbol A, any of THP01 to THP02 In the case of jackpot symbol B, it is determined to be any one of THP03 to THP04, in the case of a loss with reach, it is determined to be any of THP11 to THP12, and in the case of a loss without reach, it is determined to be any of THP14 to THP16. Determined by

In the case of jackpot symbol A, THP01 is determined with a probability of 75%, and THP02 is determined with a probability of 25%. In the case of jackpot symbol B, THP03 is determined with a probability of 75%, and THP04 is determined with a probability of 25%. In the case of a loss with reach, THP11 is determined with a probability of 25%, and THP12 is determined with a probability of 75%. If there is no reach and the number of reserved special drawings is 0 to 2, there is an 80% probability that THP14 will be determined, a 20% probability that THP15 will be determined, and a 0% probability that THP16 will be determined. . If there is no reach and the number of reserved special drawings is 3 to 4, there is a 0% probability that THP14 will be decided, a 20% probability that it will be decided THP15, and an 80% probability that it will be decided THP16. .

In addition, as shown in FIG. 59, the special symbol 1 fluctuation patterns that can be determined in the time saving state include THP01, THP05, THP03, THP06, THP11 to THP12, THP14 to THP16, and in the case of jackpot symbol A, THP01 or THP05 is determined, in the case of jackpot symbol B, either THP03 or THP06 is determined, in the case of a loss with reach, it is determined to be any of THP11 to THP12, and in the case of a loss without reach, it is determined It is determined to be one of THP14 to THP16.

In the case of jackpot symbol A, THP01 is determined with a 50% probability, and THP05 is determined with a 50% probability. In the case of jackpot symbol B, THP03 is determined with a 50% probability, and THP06 is determined with a 50% probability. In the case of a loss with reach, THP11 is determined with a probability of 35%, and THP12 is determined with a probability of 65%. If there is no reach and the number of reserved special drawings is 0 to 2, there is an 80% probability that THP14 will be determined, a 20% probability that THP15 will be determined, and a 0% probability that THP16 will be determined. . If there is no reach and the number of reserved special drawings is 3 to 4, there is a 0% probability that THP14 will be decided, a 20% probability that it will be decided THP15, and an 80% probability that it will be decided THP16. .

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 58 and 59, there are normal variations, reach , N reach, and SP reach, there are incitement effects and revenge effects. Detailed explanations of the inciting performance and revenge performance will be given later, but each of the inciting performance and revenge performance has a success pattern and a failure pattern. Successful patterns are written as "success" in parentheses in the column of "Special figure variation production flow" in Figures 58 to 59, and failure patterns are written in the column of "Special figure variation production flow" in Figures 58 to 59. "Failed" is written in parentheses in the column.

Next, the presentation flow composition presentation will be explained.

The inciting effect can be executed after the SP reach in the special symbol variation effect related to the jackpot. As described later, a jackpot suggestion effect is executed at the winning/losing point of SP reach, and the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) in a manner where there is a high possibility that they will be in a disadvantageous first time shortening state. After that, an incitement effect may be performed.

In the inciting performance, success or failure is ultimately derived. When a success is finally derived in the inciting performance, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are definitively stopped and displayed in a manner indicating that the first advantageous time saving state is entered. On the other hand, if the inciting performance ultimately leads to failure, a revenge performance is subsequently performed. The agitating effect when success is derived is the agitating effect of the success pattern, and the agitating effect when failure is derived is the agitating effect of the failure pattern. In addition, in the inciting performance, before success or failure is derived, a common inciting common performance is executed in the case of a success pattern and in the case of a failure pattern. Success or failure is incited by a common inciting performance.

In the first embodiment, when an inciting effect is executed in a special symbol variation effect in a non-time-saving state, success is always derived in the inciting effect. On the other hand, when an inciting effect is executed in a special symbol variation effect in a time-saving state, a failure is always derived in the inciting effect. In other words, the derivation of success in an inciting performance suggests that the gaming state at that time is a non-time saving state, and the derivation of a failure in an inciting performance suggests that the gaming state at that time is a time saving state. .

Revenge production is carried out in a developmental or remedial manner after a failure has been derived through inciting production. In the special symbol variation performance related to a jackpot, an incitement effect may be executed, but in a non-time saving state, a failure is not derived from the inciting effect. Executed during figure variation performance.

In revenge production, success or failure is ultimately derived. In the first embodiment, when a revenge performance is executed in the special symbol variation performance related to the jackpot symbol A in the time saving state, success is always derived in the revenge performance. On the other hand, when a revenge performance is executed in the special symbol variation performance related to the jackpot symbol B in the time saving state, failure is always derived in the revenge performance. Derivation of success in the revenge performance suggests that the first advantageous time-saving state will be entered, and derivation of failure in the revenge performance suggests that the first disadvantageous time-saving state will be entered. This means that if the jackpot symbol A is stopped and displayed in the time saving state, the first advantageous time saving state will be entered after the jackpot game, and if the jackpot symbol B is stopped and displayed in the time saving state, the disadvantageous first time saving state will be after the jackpot game. This is because (see FIG. 56).

When success is finally derived in the revenge performance, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are definitively stopped and displayed in a manner indicating that the first advantageous time saving state is reached. On the other hand, when a failure is finally derived in the revenge performance, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are definitively stopped and displayed in a manner indicating that the first disadvantageous time saving state is entered. The revenge performance when this success is derived is the revenge performance of the success pattern, and the revenge performance when the failure is derived is the revenge performance of the failure pattern. In the revenge performance, before success or failure is derived, a common revenge performance is executed for both the success pattern and the failure pattern. Success or failure is fueled by the common revenge performance.

In addition, the normal variation, reach, N reach, and SP reach described in the column of "Special figure variation production flow" in FIGS. 58 to 59 are the normal variation, reach, and SP reach described in the basic embodiment. Since the effects are the same as N reach and SP reach, explanations regarding these effects flow configuration effects will be omitted.

In addition, various special figure variation patterns may be referred to by names that take into account the performance flow configuration effects executed in the special figure variation effects based on the special figure variation patterns. In the remarks column of the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 58 and 59, the name of the special figure variation pattern is shown in a form associated with the special figure variation pattern.

Furthermore, hereinafter, the special figure variation patterns (THP01 to THP06, THP11) related to the special figure variation performance in which SP reach is executed will be referred to as "SP reach variation". Furthermore, the special symbol fluctuation pattern related to the jackpot in the "SP reach fluctuation" is referred to as "SP jackpot fluctuation". In addition, in the SP jackpot variation, a special symbol variation pattern related to a special symbol variation performance in which an inciting performance or a revenge performance is not executed, in other words, a special symbol fluctuation performance that ends with SP reach is referred to as a ``normal SP jackpot fluctuation.''

In addition, a special symbol variation performance in which an incitement effect is executed after SP reach, but a revenge effect is not executed, in other words, a special pattern variation pattern related to a special figure variation effect that ends with an incitement effect is referred to as "incitement SP jackpot variation." . Furthermore, the special pattern fluctuation pattern related to the special pattern fluctuation performance in which the inciting performance is executed after the SP reach and then the revenge performance is further executed, in other words, the special pattern fluctuation performance that ends with the revenge performance is referred to as "revenge SP jackpot fluctuation". to be called.

As shown in FIGS. 58 and 59, the normal SP jackpot variation includes a normal SP jackpot A variation and a normal SP jackpot B variation, depending on the type of jackpot symbol. In addition, the inciting SP jackpot fluctuations include inciting SP jackpot A fluctuations and inciting SP jackpot B fluctuations, depending on the difference in jackpot symbol type. Furthermore, the revenge SP jackpot variation includes a revenge SP jackpot A variation and a revenge SP jackpot B variation, depending on the type of jackpot symbol.

In addition, hereinafter, the SP jackpot variation in which the promotion effect is executed regardless of whether or not the revenge effect is executed will be referred to as a "special SP jackpot variation." That is, the inciting SP jackpot fluctuation and the revenge SP jackpot fluctuation are collectively referred to as the "special SP jackpot fluctuation." In addition, the performance of the part after the SP reach in the special symbol fluctuation performance related to the special SP jackpot fluctuation, in other words, the success pattern stimulation performance, the failure pattern stimulation performance, and the revenge performance are referred to as "special performance."

Next, the flow of the special symbol fluctuation performance (performance flow) based on the special SP jackpot fluctuation will be explained.

In the special figure variation performance based on THP01 and THP03, after the normal variation is executed first, the reach is established. After reach is established, N reach is executed, and N reach develops into SP reach. Then, a jackpot suggesting performance is executed at the winning/losing point in the SP reach, and once the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed in a manner associated with the disadvantageous first time saving state. Then, from the stop display, the promotion performance of the successful pattern is progressively executed, and finally the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are definitively stopped and displayed in a manner associated with the advantageous first time saving state.

In the special figure variation performance based on THP05, after the normal variation is executed first, the reach is established. After reach is established, N reach is executed, and N reach develops into SP reach. Then, a jackpot suggesting performance is executed at the winning/losing point in the SP reach, and once the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed in a manner associated with the disadvantageous first time saving state. Then, from the stop display, the instigation effect of the failure pattern is progressively executed, and when a failure is derived from the instigation effect, the revenge effect of the success pattern is progressively executed, and ultimately the advantageous first time reduction is achieved. The performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are definitely stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to the state.

In the special figure variation performance based on THP06, after the normal variation is executed first, the reach is established. After reach is established, N reach is executed, and N reach develops into SP reach. Then, a jackpot suggesting performance is executed at the winning/losing point of the SP reach, and once the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed in a manner associated with the disadvantageous first time saving state. Then, from the stop display, the instigation effect of the failure pattern is progressively executed, and when a failure is derived from the instigation effect, the revenge effect of the failure pattern is progressively executed, and ultimately the disadvantageous first time reduction The performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are definitely stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to the state.

The incitement effect and the revenge effect are effects that are not executed in the case of a loss, but may be executed in the case of a jackpot, so a jackpot game is executed (in a game state that is advantageous to the player). This is a performance that suggests that something will happen. In addition, the incitement effect and the revenge effect are effects that can be executed both in the case of jackpot symbol A and in the case of jackpot symbol B, but as mentioned above, in the normal gaming state, even if jackpot symbol A is stopped and displayed, jackpot symbol B is Even when the game is stopped and displayed, the first time saving state is entered after the jackpot game, while in the time saving state, the first time saving state is entered after the jackpot game only when the jackpot symbol A is stopped and displayed. Therefore, the inciting performance and the revenge performance are performances that suggest that the first time-shortening state may occur.

Next, the stop display mode of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 associated with the advantageous first time saving state and the stop display mode of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 associated with the disadvantageous first time saving state in the first embodiment will be explained. do. In the basic embodiment, the effect patterns G10a representing "1" to G10i representing "9" are set as the jackpot effect patterns, but the types of jackpot effects patterns in the first embodiment are also basic. It is assumed that this is the same as the embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the stop display mode of the effect patterns EZ1 to EZ3 associated with the advantageous first time saving state is the combination of effect patterns EZ1 to EZ3 (left effect pattern EZ1, The middle effect pattern EZ2 and the right effect pattern EZ3) are composed of "3.3.3", "5.5.5", and "7.7.7". In other words, if the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are definitely stopped and displayed at any of "3.3.3", "5.5.5", and "7.7.7", it will be advantageous after the jackpot game. The first time saving state is reached. On the other hand, the stop display mode of the effect patterns EZ1 to EZ3 associated with the disadvantageous first time saving state is the combination of effect patterns EZ1 to EZ3 when they are definitely stopped and displayed (left effect pattern EZ1, middle effect pattern EZ2, right Production pattern EZ3) = "1.1.1", "2.2.2", "4.4.4", "6.6.6", "8.8.8", and "9.9"・It consists of 9. In other words, the performance patterns EZ1 to EZ3 are "1.1.1", "2.2.2", "4.4.4", "6.6.6", "8.8.8". If the display is definitely stopped in either case, the disadvantageous first time-saving state will occur after the jackpot game. Therefore, in the first embodiment, "performance pattern G10c (3)", "performance pattern G10e (5)", and "performance pattern G10g (7)" are the jackpot performance symbols associated with the advantageous first time saving state. , "Production pattern G10a (1)", "Production pattern G10b (2)", "Production pattern G10d (4)", "Production pattern G10f (6)", "Production pattern G10h (8)", and " The effect pattern G10i (9)'' is a jackpot effect pattern associated with the disadvantageous first time saving state.

Next, we will explain the function and role of the special performance. As described above, in the first embodiment, in the normal game state in which the game is played by left-handed hitting, and in the second time saving state, the performance in the normal performance mode is executed. Further, the second time saving state is a gaming state that is extremely similar to the normal gaming state in terms of ease of winning the second start opening 12. Therefore, it is difficult to distinguish between the normal gaming state and the second time saving state based on the presentation and the opening pattern of the second starting port 12. However, in the normal game state, when the jackpot symbol A is stopped and displayed, and when the jackpot symbol B is stopped and displayed, the advantageous first time saving state is entered after the jackpot game. On the other hand, in the second time-saving state, if the jackpot symbol A is stopped and displayed, the first time-saving state becomes advantageous after the jackpot game, but when the jackpot symbol B is stopped and displayed, the first time-saving state is disadvantageous after the jackpot game. become. In other words, if you hit the jackpot in the special drawing 1 lottery in the normal gaming state, there is a 100% probability that you will move to the advantageous 1st time-saving state (you can enter it), while if you hit the jackpot in the special drawing 1 drawing in the 2nd time-saving state, the probability is 50%. It is possible to transition to the first advantageous time saving state only by probability (it cannot be entered into). Therefore, even if a player plays a left-handed game in the normal performance mode, the gaming profit that will be taught after that will differ from the player's perspective depending on whether the gaming state he is staying in is the normal gaming state or the second time-saving state. Therefore, the gaming state in which you are staying is important. Therefore, if you have won a jackpot in the normal performance mode, once after the jackpot suggestion performance in SP reach, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 will be temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner associated with the disadvantageous first time saving state (temporary stop display). ), which makes the player disappointed, wondering if the player will be transferred to the first disadvantageous time saving state. In other words, even if you win a jackpot, you will feel disappointed as if you were staying in the second time-saving state where there is a possibility of shifting to the disadvantageous first time-saving state. After disappointing the player, a special performance is performed to give the player an expectation of transition (entering) into the advantageous first time-saving state, in other words, an expectation that the player is actually staying in the normal game state.

The special performance can be executed in the special pattern variation performance related to the jackpot variation, but it is not executed in the special pattern variation performance related to the loss variation. Therefore, it is certain that the jackpot has been won at least when the special performance starts. The transition rate (entry rate) to the advantageous first time saving state when winning a jackpot in the second time saving state is 50%, and the transition rate to the advantageous first time saving state when winning a jackpot in the normal gaming state ( The entry rate) is 100%, and since it makes people think that they are once staying in the second time saving state, in the inciting performance, it is as if they are transitioning from the second time saving state to the normal gaming state and then going to the advantageous first time saving state. A performance will be performed that encourages the transition rate (entry rate) to increase from 50% to 100%.

In the normal gaming state, by deriving success in the inciting performance, the second time saving state is transferred to the normal gaming state, in other words, the transition rate (entering rate) to the advantageous first time saving state is increased from 50% to 100%. %, and then the inciting performance ends, and the performance patterns EZ1 to EZ3 are definitively stopped and displayed in a manner associated with the advantageous first time-saving state. On the other hand, in the second time saving state, by deriving a failure in the promotion performance, the second time saving state is transferred to the normal gaming state, in other words, the transition rate (entering rate) to the advantageous first time saving state is changed from 50% to After the content that the increase to 100% has failed is developed, the inciting performance ends and the revenge performance begins.

The fact that the revenge performance has started means that the player is already in the second time saving state. However, even if you win a jackpot in the second time saving state, there is a 50% chance that it will transition to the first advantageous time saving state, so in revenge production, as a last chance, you will transition to the advantageous first time saving state. We will carry out a performance with content that will make you wonder whether or not you can do it.

If it is the jackpot symbol A, the revenge performance will finally show that the transition to the advantageous first time-saving state has been achieved, and the revenge performance will end, and the performance symbol EZ1 to EZ3 are definitely stopped and displayed in a manner associated with the first advantageous time saving state. On the other hand, if it is the jackpot symbol B, the revenge production will show that the transition (entering) to the advantageous first time saving state has failed, and the revenge production will end, and production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 will be displayed. is displayed as a definitive stop in a manner associated with the first disadvantageous time saving state.

In this way, when a success is derived in the inciting performance, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are definitely stopped and displayed in a manner associated with the advantageous first time saving state, so the success becomes the advantageous first time saving state. However, at the time of success, it is confirmed that the game is in the normal gaming state. On the other hand, if failure is derived in the inciting performance, it is confirmed that the second time saving state is at that point. Therefore, the promotion performance can basically be positioned as a production that promotes whether the gaming state in which the player is staying is the normal gaming state or the second time saving state. Although it turns out that the revenge performance is in the second time saving state, there is still hope of transitioning (entering) into the advantageous first time saving state, and it is possible to shift to the advantageous first time saving state. It can be positioned as a production that incites whether or not it is true.

Next, the special symbol variation effect based on the special SP jackpot variation will be specifically explained. FIGS. 60 to 63 are diagrams illustrating how a special performance including an incitement performance and a revenge performance is being performed on the display section 50a. In the following, for convenience, the display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3, the pending icon, and the display of the icon will be omitted.

For example, a jackpot suggestion effect is executed in SP reach (see Figure 27 (B-1) and Figure 29 (B)), and then, as shown in Figure 60 (A), it is associated with the disadvantageous first time saving state. After the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in the manner as shown in FIG. When the inciting performance is started, as shown in FIG. 60(B), an image suggesting the start of the inciting performance (inciting performance start image G30) is temporarily displayed in a manner associated with the first disadvantageous time saving state. It is displayed superimposed on the effect patterns EZ1 to EZ3 that are being stopped and displayed.

Although the specific display content of the inciting effect start image G30 is not particularly limited and can be set as appropriate, in the first embodiment, a phrase (Press the button to increase the entry rate) that includes the function/role of the inciting effect is used. It is configured. When the inciting effect start image G30 is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds), as shown in FIG. 60(C), the inciting effect start image G30 is switched to the operation promotion effect image G12, and the first effect button 40k is pressed. This operation promotion effect is started, and the operation validity period of the first effect button 40k ends. The display of this inciting effect start image G30 and the operation promotion effect constitute a common inciting effect. Note that the effective operation time related to the operation promotion performance that constitutes the promotion performance is not particularly limited and can be set as appropriate, but in the first embodiment, it is set to 4 seconds.

As shown in FIGS. 60(C) to 60(D), when the first effect button 40k is operated while the remaining time of the effective operation period related to the operation promotion effect is decreasing, or the remaining time of the effective period of operation When the operation promotion performance (common promotion performance) ends (when the effective operation time elapses without the first performance button 40k being operated after the operation promotion performance starts), the operation promotion performance (common promotion performance) ends, and the success related to the promotion performance, or failure is derived. That is, the operation promotion performance constitutes a turning point between success and failure regarding the promotion performance (a turning point between success and failure of the promotion).

When success is derived in the inciting performance, a success suggestion performance that suggests the success is executed. Although the specific presentation content of the success suggestion presentation can be set as appropriate, in the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. It is composed of a display on the display unit 50a and an output from the speaker 52 of a sound associated with the success (success-suggesting sound: kyuinkyuinkyuin).

When the success suggestion performance is executed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 4 seconds), the success suggestion performance ends, and the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner associated with the advantageous first time saving state. (not shown), and in response to the stop display of the jackpot symbol, as shown in FIG. 61(B), the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are definitely stopped and displayed in a manner that is associated with the advantageous first time saving state. do. Then, in response to the start of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 61(C), an image (an advantageous first time-saving state jackpot start image) G31 showing that a jackpot game that will become an advantageous first time-saving state is started thereafter. is displayed on the display section 50a. The specific display content of the advantageous first time saving state jackpot start image G31 is not particularly limited and can be set as appropriate; however, in the first embodiment, it is composed of a phrase (SPECIAL BONUS) representing a special jackpot ing.

When a failure is derived in the inciting performance, a failure suggestion performance that suggests the failure is executed. Although the specific presentation content of the failure suggestion presentation can be set as appropriate, in the first embodiment, the stop display is temporarily displayed in a manner associated with the disadvantageous first time saving state as shown in FIG. 62(A). This consists of the appearance of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the output from the speaker 52 of the sound (failure suggestion sound: pushoon) associated with the failure. When the failure suggestion performance is executed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 2 seconds), the failure suggestion performance ends and the revenge performance is started.

When the revenge effect is started, as shown in FIGS. 62(B) to 62(C), the effect patterns EZ1 to EZ3 in the form of showing a jackpot aligned horizontally with the same effect pattern G10 are displayed as a jackpot effect. The symbols are slowly scrolled from bottom to top so that they are replaced in ascending order. Then, when this scrolling display is executed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds), as shown in FIG. , "6"), the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed (temporary stop display). Here, as a temporary temporary stop display, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 aligned in the horizontal direction are swung relatively quickly as a whole approximately at the vertical center of the display section 50a. A scrolling display of performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 arranged in a manner indicating such a jackpot, and a manner associated with any disadvantageous first time saving state ("6" in FIG. 63(A)) The temporary stop display of performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 constitutes a revenge common performance.

Then, the temporary stop display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 in the mode associated with any disadvantageous first time saving state (“6” in FIG. 63(A)) is displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds). When executed, the temporary stop display (revenge common effect) ends, and success or failure related to the revenge effect is derived. That is, the temporary stop display constitutes a turning point between success and failure regarding the revenge performance (revenge success/failure turning point).

If a failure is derived in the revenge performance, as shown in Figure 63 (B-1), the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that were temporarily stopped and displayed will completely stop, and the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 will be at a disadvantage. Definitely stop and display in a manner associated with the first time saving state. Then, in response to the start of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. ) G32 is displayed on the display section 50a. The specific display content of the disadvantageous first time saving state jackpot start image G32 is not particularly limited and can be set as appropriate, but in the first embodiment, a phrase (REGULAR BONUS) expressing the meaning of "normal jackpot" is used. It is configured.

When a success is derived in the revenge performance, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3, which were temporarily stopped and displayed, move vigorously (slide) downward and are arranged in a manner corresponding to the advantageous first time-saving state. The effect patterns EZ1 to EZ3 fade in vigorously from top to bottom, and as shown in FIG. 63 (B-2), the effect patterns EZ1 to EZ3 are fixed in a manner corresponding to the advantageous first time saving state. Stop and display. Then, in response to the start of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 63 (C-2), an advantageous first time saving state jackpot start image G31 is displayed on the display section 50a.

Next, a loss time-saving negative performance that can be performed by the pachinko game machine PY1 will be explained. The loss time saving negative performance is a performance that suggests that the player is not currently staying in the second time saving state but in the normal gaming state in the normal performance mode. In addition, the loss time-saving negative performance is performed when the first performance button 40k is operated in a predetermined manner until 3 seconds have elapsed after the special figure fluctuation display, in other words, the start of the special figure fluctuation performance in the normal game state and normal performance mode. This can be done depending on the situation. As mentioned above, in the normal performance mode, although the game progresses with left-handed play, it is difficult to determine whether the game is in the normal game state or the second time-saving state (losing time-saving state). However, in the first embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the normal gaming state, the transition rate (entry rate) to the advantageous first time-saving state is 100%, whereas when a jackpot is won in the second time-saving state (losing time-saving). In this case, the transition rate (entering rate) to the first advantageous time-saving state is 50%. Therefore, in the normal production mode, the player stays in the normal gaming state, in other words, the transition rate (entering rate) to the advantageous first time-saving state is 50% when the player hits the jackpot based on the normal gaming state. I hope you haven't fallen. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is configured to be able to execute a losing time-saving negative performance in the normal gaming state. Note that the pachinko game machine PY1 does not execute the loss time saving negative effect in the second time saving state (loss time saving). This is because false information will be conveyed to the players.

Next, we will specifically explain the loss time-saving denial effect. FIG. 64 schematically shows the display section 50a and the speaker 52 extracted. In the following, for convenience, the display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3, the pending icon, and the display of the icon will be omitted. Further, in the situation shown in FIG. 64, it is assumed that the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is staying in the normal gaming state.

For example, as shown in FIG. 64(A), the first normal background image G111 is displayed on the entire display section 50a, and the effect patterns EZ1 to EZ3 are displayed in a manner that indicates a loss in a superimposed manner on the first normal background image G111. In response to the start of the special figure 1 variable display from the completely stopped display state (not shown), the variable display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 (the special figure variable Suppose that the performance (direction) has started.

Here, it is assumed that the first performance button 40k is operated in a predetermined manner until 5 seconds have elapsed since the start of the variable display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 (special symbol variation performance). Note that the specific content of the predetermined operation related to the first performance button 40k for executing the losing time saving performance is not particularly limited and can be set as appropriate; It consists of a continuous operation (long press) for 3 seconds. Then, when the first performance button 40k is operated in a predetermined manner, a losing time-saving negative performance is immediately executed in response to the operation. The specific performance content of the losing time-saving negative performance is that the player stays in the normal gaming state, or the transition rate (entering rate) to the first advantageous time-saving state if the player hits a jackpot based on the normal gaming state. However, in the first embodiment, the transition rate to the advantageous first time-saving state when a jackpot is achieved based on the normal gaming state ( The speaker 52 outputs a sound (losing time-saving denial effect sound) suggesting that the entry rate) has not fallen to 50%, and the frame lamp 53 is emitted in a manner associated with the losing time-saving denial effect (loss failure time saving effect sound). It consists of a time-saving negative effect light emission).

The specific content of the losing time-saving negative production voice is that ``If you stay in the normal gaming state, or if you hit the jackpot based on the normal gaming state, the transition rate (entering rate) to the first advantageous time-saving state is 50%. Although the setting can be set as appropriate within a range where it is possible to recognize that the user has not fallen down, in the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. This is the advantageous 1st advantage when hitting a jackpot based on the normal gaming state, which means that the transition rate (entering rate) to the time saving state has not fallen to 50%. This is an extracted part of the line, ``I don't think so,'' which suggests that the transition rate (entering rate) to the time-saving state has not fallen to 50%. In addition, the specific content of the losing time-saving effect light emission is as follows: ``If you stay in the normal gaming state, or if you hit the jackpot based on the normal gaming state, the transition rate (entering rate) to the first advantageous time-saving state Although it can be set as appropriate within a range that allows recognition of "that it has not fallen to 50%," in the first embodiment, it is configured to emit red light in accordance with the losing time-saving negative effect sound.

Further, the performance time of the losing time-saving negative performance is not particularly limited and can be set as appropriate, but in the first embodiment, it is set to 3 seconds. Then, when the losing time-saving negative effect is finished, as shown in FIG. 64(D), the output of the losing time-saving negative effect sound from the speaker 52 is finished, and the frame lamp 53 ends the losing time-saving negative effect light emission.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 64(A) to 64(B), when the first effect button 40k is operated in a predetermined manner at the start of the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 in the normal gaming state, the loss time is shortened. A negative effect is executed, but in response to a predetermined operation of the first effect button 40k, an effect that prompts the operation is not executed. For example, the operation promotion effect image G12 as shown in FIG. 60 is not displayed. However, for example, when starting the variable display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 in the normal gaming state, an operation promotion performance for a predetermined operation of the first performance button 40k is executed, and when the operation promotion performance is being executed, the operation promotion performance is executed. 1 When the performance button 40k is operated, a so-called "notice performance (a performance suggesting that there is a possibility of a jackpot, a performance that increases the expectation level of a jackpot by being executed)" is executed, When the first performance button 40k is operated in a predetermined manner on this occasion, the advance notice performance may be executed, and the losing time-saving negative performance may also be executed. On the other hand, in this case, priority may be given to the advance notice performance and the time-saving negative performance for losing the game may not be executed. Further, regarding this preview performance, if the first performance button 40k is not operated while the operation promotion performance is being executed and the operation validity period related to the operation promotion performance has elapsed, the preview performance is executed. good. However, in that case, since the first performance button 40k is not operated, the losing time-saving negative performance is not executed.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 64, the game state in which the user is staying at that time is the normal game state, so the loss time saving negative effect is executed, but the game state in which the user is staying is in the second time saving state (loss time saving). In this case, even if the first performance button 40k is operated in a predetermined manner at the start of the variable display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3, the loss time saving negative performance is not executed.

As described above, according to the pachinko game machine PY1, while the normal performance mode is similarly performed in the normal game state and the second time saving state, the left-handed game is performed. If you win a jackpot in the gaming state, you will shift to the first advantageous time saving state with a 100% probability, while if you win the jackpot in the second time saving state, you will shift to the advantageous first time saving state with a 50% probability. Therefore, for example, if the losing symbol B is stopped and displayed while the game is progressing with left-handed hitting in the normal gaming state, the player will transition to the second time saving state without noticing it, and if he hits the jackpot, The transition rate (entering rate) to the advantageous first time-saving state, where the possibility of successive games advantageous to the player is relatively high, falls from 100% to 50%. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of tension and improve his/her interest in the game even when the game is played with left-handed batting in the normal performance mode that is the base (base point) of the pachinko game machine PY1. Furthermore, when the normal gaming state shifts to the second time saving state based on the stop display of the losing symbol B, the production that suggests and informs the transition is not executed, the normal production mode is maintained, and the normal gaming state and Since the second time saving state is very similar in terms of ease of winning into the second start opening 12, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the normal gaming state has transitioned to the second time saving state. The sense of tension given to the player is further increased.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the normal gaming state has shifted to the second time saving state, in other words, it is difficult to distinguish the gaming state in which the player is staying in the normal performance mode. For example, when a special symbol variation performance related to a special SP jackpot variation is executed while the game is progressing in a difficult situation, it is confirmed for the time being that a jackpot has been won by the jackpot suggestion performance in the SP reach. Therefore, although players were worried because it was difficult to determine their gaming status, they now feel joy when they have confirmed that they have won a jackpot, which improves their interest in playing while preventing the players from losing their desire to play. At the same time, it is possible to prevent the player from stopping the game midway through the game and reducing the operating rate.

In addition, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1, after the jackpot suggestion presentation in the special symbol fluctuation performance related to the special SP jackpot fluctuation, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner associated with the disadvantageous first time saving state. After the jackpot win is confirmed, the inciting effect is executed, and the result (success/failure) derived from the inciting effect indicates the gaming state in which you are staying (in the case of success, the normal gaming state/failure). (in the case of the second time saving state), it is possible to prevent the player from feeling unsatisfied and losing his or her desire to play because the game progresses without knowing the gaming state in which the player is staying. In addition, in this case, even if it turns out that the player is staying in the second time-saving state, which is disadvantageous for the player, the player can still play the game up to that point, so it is possible to prevent the operating rate from decreasing. At the same time, it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from decreasing because he or she has at least won a jackpot. Furthermore, even if it turns out that the player is staying in the second time shortening state due to a failure in the inciting performance, the revenge performance will be executed subsequently, and after the jackpot game, the player will receive an advantageous result. Since there is still a possibility of transitioning (entering) into the advantageous first time-saving state where the possibility of winning consecutive games is relatively high, the player's sense of anticipation can be maintained.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1, when the special symbol variation effect is being executed in the normal gaming state, it is suggested that the player is not currently staying in the second time saving state but is staying in the normal gaming state. A time-saving negative effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide useful information to players while improving the operating rate of the pachinko game machine PY1. Furthermore, the losing time saving negative performance is not executed in the second time saving state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged. Further, although the loss time saving negative effect can be executed by a predetermined operation on the first effect button 40k, the operation promotion effect for the operation is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the pachinko gaming machine PY1.

(Example of modification of the first embodiment)
Next, a modification example of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the first embodiment will be described. Note that it is also possible to appropriately combine the modification examples described below.

In the first embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the normal gaming state, the game always transitions (enters) into the advantageous first time-saving state, but it may also be configured such that it may transition (enter) into the disadvantageous first time-saving state. Furthermore, the specific probability of transitioning (entering) into the first advantageous time-saving state when winning a jackpot in the normal gaming state, and the probability of transitioning (entering) into the advantageous first time-saving state when winning a jackpot in the second time-saving state. The values may also be changed as appropriate. However, if you win a jackpot in the second time saving state, the probability of moving to the first advantageous time saving state is higher than the probability of moving to the first advantageous time saving state if you win a jackpot in the normal gaming state. is preferred.

The prescribed number of time reductions related to the advantageous first time reduction state (advantageous first prescribed number of time reductions) and the prescribed number of time reductions related to the disadvantageous first time reduction state (disadvantageous first prescribed number of time reductions) are not limited to the first embodiment, and may be changed as appropriate. It's okay. However, in order to make the gaming experience of the pachinko machine PY1 more varied, a jackpot is essentially won in the second jackpot determination based on winning in the second starting opening 12, which is the main base point of the game, in the first time saving state. As a relationship between the probability of winning (Special 2 real jackpot winning probability), the advantageous first time saving prescribed number of times, and the unfavorable first time saving prescribed number of times, the special 2 real jackpot where the advantageous first time saving prescribed number of times represents the numerator as "1" It is preferable that it is larger than the denominator of the winning probability, and that the disadvantageous first time saving specified number of times is smaller than the denominator of the special 2 real jackpot winning probability whose numerator is expressed as "1".

Further, in the first embodiment, there are two types of jackpot symbols related to the special drawing 1, but there may be three or more types. In this case, there may be three or more types of time saving specified times depending on the type of jackpot symbol. Alternatively, depending on the type of the jackpot symbol related to the special drawing 1, the number of executions of the round game and the prescribed number of times of time saving may be appropriately combined. Further, in the first embodiment, the number of types of jackpot symbols related to the special drawing 2 is one, but it may be two or more types. In this case, there may be two or more types of time saving specified times depending on the type of jackpot symbol. Alternatively, the number of times the round game is executed may vary depending on the type of jackpot symbol related to the special figure 2.

Furthermore, the specific performance contents of the inciting performance and revenge performance, as well as the types of performance devices that execute the inciting performance and revenge performance, are not limited to the first embodiment, and may be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the special performance is executed after the SP reach, but the special performance may be executed after the reach performance different from the SP reach.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, after the jackpot suggestion performance in the special symbol fluctuation performance related to the special SP jackpot fluctuation, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner associated with the disadvantageous first time saving state. However, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 may be temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner associated with the first advantageous time saving state. In this case, the probability of success in the provocation performance and the probability of success in the revenge performance may be different depending on whether the mode is associated with the advantageous first time-saving state or the disadvantageous first time-saving state. In addition, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are not temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner associated with the disadvantageous first time saving state, and when a special performance is executed, they are always associated with the advantageous first time saving state. Depending on the mode, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 may be temporarily stopped and displayed.

There may be a plurality of types of performance patterns for the provocation performance, and the probability of success in the provocation performance may vary depending on the performance pattern for the provocation performance. For example, there are three types of operation patterns for the first effect button 40k related to the inciting effect in the first embodiment: normal single press (simple press), continuous press, and long press, and normal single press (simple press). The probability that the inciting effect will be successful may be increased in the order of <repeat press <long press. Alternatively, in the inciting performance, there is a pattern in which the first performance button 40k is operated and a pattern in which the second performance button 41k is operated, and the pattern in which the second performance button 41k is operated is better than the pattern in which the first performance button 40k is operated. It may also be possible to increase the probability of success through inciting performances.

Further, there may be a plurality of types of revenge performance patterns, and the probability of success in the revenge performance may vary depending on the revenge performance pattern. For example, in the revenge production in the first embodiment, there are two patterns in which the direction in which the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are scrolled is from bottom to top and from top to bottom, and the direction in which the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are scrolled is from bottom to top and from top to bottom. It may be arranged so that the probability of success in revenge production is higher if

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, in the special jackpot variation related to the jackpot symbol B in the second time saving state, the inciting effect always fails and the revenge effect is executed, but the inciting effect fails and the revenge effect is executed. It may be arranged so that the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are definitely stopped and displayed in a manner that is associated with the disadvantageous first time saving state without being stopped.

Further, in the first embodiment, the special performance is executed during the special symbol variation performance, but it may also be executed during the jackpot game. For example, in the case of a specific SP jackpot fluctuation, in the special symbol fluctuation performance, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are once definitively stopped and displayed in a manner associated with the disadvantageous first time saving state. Then, a special performance may be performed at the opening of a jackpot game, during the closing period of the first jackpot 14 related to a certain round game, during execution of a predetermined round game, or at the ending. However, the functions and roles of the inciting effect and the revenge effect in this case are the same as in the first embodiment. In other words, a successful promotion suggests that the gaming state in which the player was staying when winning the jackpot was the normal gaming state, and a failure in the promotion suggests that the gaming state in which the player was staying when winning the jackpot was the second time-shortening state. suggests that. Furthermore, a successful revenge performance suggests a transition (entering) to an advantageous first time-saving state, and a failure in the revenge performance suggests a transition (entering) to a disadvantageous first time-saving state.

Furthermore, the provisional stop display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 in a manner associated with the disadvantageous first time saving state after the jackpot suggesting performance illustrated in FIG. However, at this time, the production control microcomputer 121 temporarily selects the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 with the jackpot production symbols (1, 2, 6, 8, 9) associated with the disadvantageous first time saving state other than "4". A stop display may also be displayed. In this case, the performance control microcomputer 121 may allow, for example, the jackpot performance symbols associated with the five unfavorable first time-saving states to appear with the same probability. In addition, the production control microcomputer 121 makes it possible for the jackpot production symbols associated with the five disadvantageous first time saving states to appear with mutually different probabilities, and the jackpot production associated with the disadvantageous first time saving state. The degree of expectation that success will be derived from the inciting performance may vary depending on the type of symbol.

In addition, the jackpot effect pattern constituting the temporary stop display of the effect patterns EZ1 to EZ3 in a manner associated with the disadvantageous first time saving state after the jackpot suggestion effect illustrated in FIG. 60, and the jackpot effect pattern shown in FIG. It is the same but different from the jackpot effect pattern that constitutes the temporary stop display of the effect patterns EZ1 to EZ3 in a manner associated with the disadvantageous first time saving state when failure is derived in the illustrated inciting effect. You can also do it. In this case, the degree of expectation for success in the next revenge performance may be different depending on whether the revenge performance is the same or different. Furthermore, when a failure is derived in the inciting performance illustrated in FIG. 62, the provisional stop display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 in the manner associated with the disadvantageous first time saving state is the jackpot performance symbol "4". However, at this time, the production control microcomputer 121 selects production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 with jackpot production symbols (1, 2, 6, 8, 9) that are associated with the disadvantageous first time saving state other than "4". A temporary stop display may be made. In this case, the performance control microcomputer 121 may cause the jackpot performance symbols associated with the five unfavorable first time saving states to appear with the same probability. In addition, the production control microcomputer 121 causes the jackpot production symbols associated with the five unfavorable first time saving states to appear with mutually different probabilities, and the types of jackpot production symbols associated with the first disadvantageous time saving states. The degree of expectation for success in the revenge performance that is subsequently executed may be different.

Furthermore, jackpot effect symbols constituting a temporary stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 in a manner associated with the disadvantageous first time saving state when failure is derived in the inciting effect illustrated in FIG. Although the jackpot effect patterns constituting the definitive stop display of the effect patterns EZ1 to EZ3 in the manner associated with the advantageous first time-saving state when a failure is derived in the revenge effect illustrated in 63 are different. , may be made to be the same. In this case, any one of the five jackpot effect symbols associated with the disadvantageous first time-saving state may be set in any one of the effects. Alternatively, in either the incitement effect or the revenge effect, the jackpot effect pattern is always associated with any one disadvantageous first time saving state, and on the other hand, the five It may be made to be any of the jackpot effect symbols. Alternatively, in both the promotion performance and the revenge performance, any of the five jackpot performance symbols associated with the disadvantageous first time saving state may be used. In the case of any of the five jackpot effect symbols, for example, the effect control microcomputer 121 may cause the jackpot effect symbols associated with the five unfavorable first time saving states to appear with the same probability and appear with different probabilities. You may also do this.

In addition, the jackpot effect pattern constituting a definitive stop display of the effect patterns EZ1 to EZ3 in a manner associated with the advantageous first time-saving state when success is derived in the inciting effect illustrated in FIG. 61, and the figure Although the jackpot effect patterns constituting the definitive stop display of the effect patterns EZ1 to EZ3 in the manner associated with the advantageous first time-saving state when success is derived in the revenge effect illustrated in 63 are the same. , even if it is always one type, or one of the jackpot effect symbols (3, 5) associated with another advantageous first time saving state is the same, or it can be different. Also good. Alternatively, in either the incitement effect or the revenge effect, the jackpot effect pattern is always associated with any one advantageous first time-saving state, and on the other hand, the three advantageous first time-saving conditions are It may be made to be any of the jackpot effect symbols. Alternatively, in both the promotion performance and the revenge performance, any of the three jackpot performance symbols associated with the advantageous first time saving state may be used. In the case of any of the three jackpot effect symbols, for example, the effect control microcomputer 121 may cause the jackpot effect symbols associated with the three advantageous first time-saving states to appear with the same probability and appear with different probabilities. You may also do this.

Furthermore, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3, which are definitively stopped and displayed when success is derived in the revenge performance illustrated in FIG. 63, are temporarily stopped and displayed at the revenge success/failure junction in the revenge performance illustrated in FIG. This is the one that is scrolled and displayed next to the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, but it may be one that is scheduled to be scrolled and displayed even later.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1, the loss time-saving negative performance may be executed during the period from the start of the special symbol fluctuation performance to the elapse of a predetermined time (3 seconds) in the normal gaming state; however, the loss time-saving negative performance is The executable time is not limited to the first embodiment, and may be changed as appropriate. For example, it may be possible to execute the losing time-saving negative performance during the entire period of each special symbol variation performance in the normal gaming state. Alternatively, the losing time-saving negative performance may be made possible to be executed during the entire period of the normal variation of each special symbol variation performance in the normal gaming state. The loss time-saving negative performance may be made executable during a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) before the special figure variation performance ends. In addition, the losing time-saving negative performance is performed during the special symbol fluctuation performance where a reach is established until a predetermined time has passed after the reach is established, from a predetermined time before the reach is established until the reach is established, or during the period from when the reach is established until the reach is established. In this case, it may be possible to perform a time-saving denial effect of losing.

Furthermore, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1, although the loss time saving negative effect is always executed in response to a predetermined operation of the first effect button 40k, it may not be executed even if the first effect button 40k is operated in a predetermined manner. You can also do it. For example, when the performance control microcomputer 121 is staying in the normal gaming state, when the first performance button 40k is operated in a predetermined manner when the special symbol variation performance is started, the performance control microcomputer 121 executes the losing time-saving negative performance. It is also possible to make a determination as to whether or not the game is successful, and if it is determined to be executed, to execute the losing time-saving negative effect. In this case, the probability that it is determined that the losing time-saving negative effect will be executed is constant regardless of the jackpot judgment result related to the special figure variation effect, the special figure variation pattern judgment result, and the period that has passed since the transition to the normal gaming state. It may be set as follows. Further, the probability of determining that the losing time-saving negative performance will be performed may be different depending on the jackpot determination result and the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination result related to the special symbol variation performance. That is, the execution of the losing time-saving performance may also indicate the degree of expectation of a gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a jackpot gaming state. Alternatively, the probability of determining that the losing time-saving negative effect will be executed may be changed depending on the period that has passed since the transition to the normal gaming state. For example, as the period that has elapsed since the transition to the normal gaming state becomes longer, the probability of determining that the loss time saving negative performance will be executed may increase. For example, if the number of special figure fluctuation displays executed after transitioning to the normal gaming state is in the order of 1 to 100 times < 101 times to 200 times < 201 times to 300 times < 301 times, the losing time-saving negative effect is performed. The probability of being determined to be executed may gradually increase. On the other hand, as the period that has passed since the transition to the normal gaming state becomes longer, the probability that it is determined that the losing time saving negative effect will be executed may be decreased. For example, if the number of special figure fluctuation displays executed after transitioning to the normal gaming state is in the order of 1 to 100 times < 101 times to 200 times < 201 times to 300 times < 301 times, the losing time-saving negative effect is performed. The probability of being determined to be executed may be gradually reduced.

Further, in the pachinko game machine PY1, the execution conditions for the losing time-saving effect include a predetermined operation of the first effect button 40k, but the predetermined operation of the first effect button 40k may not be included. In this case, for example, when the performance control microcomputer 121 is staying in the normal gaming state, it determines whether or not to execute the losing time-saving negative performance every time the special symbol variation performance is started, and when it is executed. If the determination is made, a negative time-saving effect may be executed. In this case, the probability that it is determined that the losing time-saving negative effect will be executed is constant regardless of the jackpot judgment result related to the special figure variation effect, the special figure variation pattern judgment result, and the period that has passed since the transition to the normal gaming state. It may be set as follows. Further, the probability of determining that the losing time-saving negative performance will be performed may be different depending on the jackpot determination result and the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination result related to the special symbol variation performance.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, when the losing time saving negative performance is executed, it is determined that the normal gaming state is established, that is, the execution of the losing time saving negative performance is a suggestion that the normal gaming state is, The loss time saving negative performance can be executed in both the normal gaming state and the second time saving state, and may be a performance suggesting that there is a possibility of being in the normal gaming state. In this case, for example, in any gaming state, it is determined whether or not to execute the losing time-saving negative effect each time the special figure fluctuation effect is started, and if it is determined to be executed, the losing time-saving negative effect is executed. You can do it like this. Then, for example, the probability that it is determined that the losing time-saving negative performance will be executed in the normal gaming state is different from the probability that it is determined that the losing time-saving negative performance will be executed in the second time-saving state, and the losing time-saving negative performance is executed. This may allow the player to guess in which gaming state he or she is staying. Further, there may be a plurality of performance modes for the losing time saving performance, and the probability of being in the normal gaming state may vary depending on the performance mode. For example, there are performance modes 1 to 5 for the loss time saving performance, and performance mode 1 suggests that there is a 20% chance of being in the normal gaming state, and performance mode 2 is the normal gaming state. It suggests that there is a 40% possibility that the game is in the normal gaming state, and presentation mode 3 suggests that the possibility of the normal gaming state is 60%, and presentation mode 4 suggests that the probability of the normal gaming state is 80%. It may be possible to suggest that there is a possibility that the performance mode 5 is in the normal gaming state and that there is a 100% possibility that the state is in the normal gaming state.

Further, in the first embodiment, there is no restriction on the opportunity to perform the losing time-saving negative performance, but there may be a restriction on the execution opportunity of the losing time-saving negative performance. For example, once the losing time-saving negative effect is executed, the losing time-saving negative effect may not be executed for a predetermined period thereafter. This predetermined period includes, for example, a period until the special figure variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (e.g., 100 times), a period until a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 250) are fired, a specific period such as reach, etc. The period may be a period until the performance is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times), a period until a new demonstration performance is executed, or a period until a new normal gaming state is entered. Note that these execution opportunity limitations may be applied to the determination opportunity when determining whether or not to execute the loss time saving negative effect.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the losing time-saving negative effect suggests that the player is staying in the normal gaming state (the transition rate (entering rate) to the first advantageous time-saving state has not fallen). However, instead of or in addition to this, it is performed as a performance in which the player stays in the second time saving state (the transition rate (entering rate) to the advantageous first time saving state falls). It is also possible to make it possible to perform a performance that suggests that

In addition, in the first embodiment, it is a so-called "1 type 2 type mixing machine", and the game state related to the probability of being determined to be a jackpot in the jackpot determination is only one type, the normal probability state, but the basic embodiment The gaming states related to the probability of being judged as a jackpot in the jackpot determination include a normal probability state and a high probability state, and the advantageous first time saving state of the first embodiment is replaced with a high probability high base gaming state, The disadvantageous first time saving state may be replaced with a low probability high base game state. In this case, the ending conditions may be different or the same for the high-probability, high-base gaming state and the low-probability, high-base gaming state.

<Second embodiment>
Next, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described based on the above-described basic embodiment of the present invention and the first embodiment. Note that the same reference numerals and terms are used for the basic embodiment and the same configuration as the first embodiment, or similar configurations.

The pachinko game machine PY2 according to the second embodiment has a special symbol type (special symbol type) that triggers the occurrence of the jackpot game when a jackpot is achieved, and a transition based on the termination of the jackpot game corresponding to the special symbol type. The pachinko gaming machine PY1 is different from the pachinko gaming machine PY1 in terms of the gaming states to be played and the relationship with the ending conditions related to the gaming states. Specifically, regarding the relationship between the jackpot symbol B in the time saving state, the gaming state to which the second jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot symbol B is terminated, and the ending conditions related to the gaming state, pachinko gaming machine PY1 and pachinko gaming machine PY2 are different.

FIG. 65 shows the type of special symbol (special symbol type) that triggers the occurrence of the jackpot game in the case of a jackpot in the time saving state (first time saving state and second time saving state) and the special symbol type in the second embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a game state setting table showing the relationship between the game state to which the jackpot game corresponding to the symbol type ends and the termination condition related to the game state.

As shown in FIG. 65, if the type of special symbol that triggers a jackpot in the time saving state (first time saving state and second time saving state) is jackpot symbol B, the special symbol type Upon completion of the corresponding second jackpot game, a normal game state is entered. No end conditions are set for this normal gaming state. In addition, the type of special symbol (special symbol type) that triggers the occurrence of the jackpot game in cases other than jackpot symbol B in the time saving state, and the gaming state to which the jackpot game transitions with the end of the jackpot game corresponding to the special symbol type. and the relationship with the ending conditions related to the gaming state, the type of special symbol that triggers the occurrence of the jackpot game in the normal gaming state (special symbol type), and the transition with the end of the jackpot game corresponding to the special symbol type. The relationship between the gaming state to be played and the ending condition related to the gaming state is the same as in the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 65, when the jackpot symbol B is stopped and displayed in the time saving state (first time saving state and second time saving state), when the second jackpot game ends, the normal game state is entered. , the main game flow related to the pachinko game machine PY2 is also different from that of the pachinko game machine PY1.

FIG. 66 is a diagram schematically showing the main game flow in the pachinko gaming machine PY2. Here, differences from the main game flow related to pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be explained. In the pachinko game machine PY1, when the stop display of the jackpot symbol B is performed in the second time saving state, the second jackpot game is executed (jackpot 2), and with the end of the second jackpot game, the prescribed number of time saving times is 10. The first time-saving state (disadvantageous first time-saving state) and the chance mode of the game are entered, and a right-handed game is developed. On the other hand, in the pachinko game machine PY2, when the stop display of the jackpot symbol B is performed in the second time saving state, when the second jackpot game ends, it enters the normal gaming state and the normal production mode, and the left-handed game is started. It will be expanded. In other words, through the jackpot game, it was not possible to shift (enter) the first time saving state where the ease of winning the second starting opening 12 is higher than the second time saving state, but if the jackpot is won, the jackpot game Through this, a transition has been made to the normal game state and normal performance mode in which the player can shift (enter) into the advantageous first time-saving state in which he can have high expectations for successive games.

In this way, there are two routes for transitioning to the normal gaming state and normal performance mode: one is when the RAM clear switch (not shown) is operated when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine PY2, and the other is when the jackpot is entered in the second time saving state and the normal performance mode. There are cases where the symbol B is displayed in a stopped state. Therefore, the stop display of the losing symbol C is displayed not only after the RAM clear switch (not shown) is operated when the power is turned on, but also after the player is unable to shift (enter) into the advantageous first time saving state by hitting the left hand. As long as this is not done, a situation will be maintained in which if a jackpot is hit, the player can reliably transition (enter) into the advantageous first time-saving state where he can have high expectations for winning consecutive games, which will improve the game's interest and improve the game. It is possible to give the player a sense of security throughout, and to motivate the player to continue playing the game, thereby suppressing a decrease in the operating rate.

In addition, in the first embodiment, when the stop display of the jackpot symbol B is performed in the second time saving state and the normal performance mode and the disadvantageous first time saving state is entered, the consecutive time saving state is compared to the case where the advantageous first time saving state is entered. Although expectations for the game are low, for players, the second jackpot determination based on the winning in the second starting opening 12 includes a small win, so the first jackpot based on winning in the first starting opening 11 is small. There is a higher possibility of winning the jackpot than in the judgment (which is advantageous to the player), and furthermore, it has the advantage that it is difficult to reduce the number of game balls in possession compared to the normal gaming state. However, on the other hand, if you exit the first time saving state without hitting the jackpot in the disadvantageous first time saving state, the transition rate (entering rate) to the advantageous first time saving state is 50% in the case of a jackpot, and the second time saving state and normal production mode. There is a disadvantage of having to migrate. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, when the stop display of the jackpot symbol B is performed in the second time saving state and the normal performance mode, it is difficult to make a jackpot and the number of game balls in possession is easy to decrease compared to the second time saving state. Although the normal gaming state is entered, in the normal gaming state, the transition rate (entering rate) to the advantageous first time saving state in the event of a jackpot is 100%, which gives the player a sense of security and reduces the feeling of restarting. You can come out and make your game more interesting.

<Third embodiment>
Next, a third embodiment of the present invention will be described based on the above-described basic embodiment of the present invention and the first embodiment. Note that the same reference numerals and terms are used for the basic embodiment and the same configuration as the first embodiment, or similar configurations.

The pachinko game machine PY3 according to the third embodiment is different from the pachinko game machine PY1 with respect to the relationship between the losing symbol type according to the special drawing 1 and the prescribed number of time reductions related to the loss time reduction. Specifically, there are three types of losing symbols in the special drawing 1: a losing symbol A, a losing symbol B1, and a losing symbol B2. The losing pattern A is in the same position as the losing pattern A related to the special figure 1 in the first embodiment, and has the same function in terms of specifications. On the other hand, the losing symbols B1 and B2 are losing symbols that shift the gaming state related to the ease of winning into the second start opening 12 to the second time-saving state. That is, when the stop display of the losing symbol B1 and the stop display of the losing symbol B2 are performed in the special figure 1 variable display, the second time saving state continues without executing the jackpot game. However, as in the case of the first embodiment, when the stop display of losing symbols B1 and B2 is performed and the jackpot game is not executed and the second time saving state is entered, it is because the normal gaming state remains. Only when doing so. Even if the losing pattern B1 and the losing pattern B2 are stopped and displayed in a time saving state such as a first time saving state or a second time saving state, the second time saving state does not occur.

In addition, when the loss pattern B1 or the loss pattern B2 is stopped and displayed in the normal game state, the jackpot game is not executed and the transition is made to the second time saving state, but in this case, the prescribed number of time reductions related to the second time saving state is It varies depending on the symbol type. Specifically, the prescribed number of times of time saving related to the second time saving state based on the losing symbol B1 is 1200 times, and the prescribed number of time reducing times related to the second time saving state based on the losing symbol B2 is 50 times.

Here, FIG. 67 shows a configuration example of a losing symbol type determination table according to the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 67, according to the losing symbol type determination table for special drawing 1, losing symbol A is determined with a probability of 196/199, losing symbol B1 is determined with a probability of 1/199, and losing symbol B1 is determined with a probability of 2/199. The probability is determined to be the losing symbol B2.

In the loss symbol type determination table, the determination value of the loss symbol type random number (the loss symbol type random number determination value) is appropriately distributed to the loss symbol type that is the result of the loss symbol type determination so that the selection rate shown in FIG. 67 is achieved. It is being Note that the number of losing symbol types and the selection rate of each losing symbol type are not limited to the third embodiment, and may be set as appropriate.

Next, the main game flow related to the pachinko gaming machine PY3 will be explained. FIG. 68 is a diagram schematically showing the main game flow in the pachinko gaming machine PY3. Here, differences from the main game flow related to pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be explained. In the pachinko gaming machine PY3, when the stop display of the losing symbol B1 is performed in the normal gaming state and the normal performance mode, and when the stop display of the losing symbol B2 is performed, the transition to the second time saving state and the normal performance mode is performed. do.

In addition, in the third embodiment, similar to the first embodiment, the special figure variation effect is executed in the same normal effect mode in the normal game state in which the game progresses by left-handed hitting and the second time saving state, but as will be described later. As such, apart from the special figure variation effect based on the special figure variable display (separate system from the special figure variation effect based on the special figure variable display), when staying in the normal gaming state, you will stay in the normal gaming state. A performance suggesting that the person is staying in the second time-saving state is executed (a performance suggesting a normal stay), and when the user is staying in the second time-saving state, a performance suggesting that the user is staying in the second time-saving state (a losing time-shortening stay suggesting performance) is executed.

Further, the same losing time shortening stay suggestion performance is executed when the losing pattern B1 is stopped and displayed to shift to the second time saving state, and when the losing pattern B2 is stopped and displayed to the second time saving state. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to determine whether the specified number of time reductions related to the second time reduction state is 50 or 1200 based on the losing time reduction stay suggestion performance. In addition, the losing time shortening stay suggestion effect is for the period until the special symbol variable display is executed 50 times for the first time when the losing pattern B1 shifts to the second time saving state due to the stopping display of the losing pattern B1, and the period until the first time is executed by the stopping display of the losing pattern B2. 2 It is executed during the period (total period) until the special figure variable display is executed 50 times when transitioning to the time saving state.

Then, when the special symbol variable display is executed the prescribed number of times (50 times) without hitting the jackpot after shifting to the second time-saving state related to the losing symbol B2, the state immediately shifts from the second time-saving state to the normal gaming state. At the same time, the performance suggesting a short stay for a short period of time is switched to the performance suggesting a normal stay. The transition from this second time saving state to the normal gaming state is referred to as "second time saving exit". Furthermore, when the losing time shortening staying suggestion effect is being executed, the player can check whether the player is staying in the second time saving state related to the losing symbol B1 or in the second time saving state related to the losing symbol B2 at that time. Although it cannot be determined, as mentioned above, there is no transition from the second time saving state where the specified number of time saving times is 1200 times to the normal gaming state (see Figure 57), so the losing time shortening stay suggestion performance changes to the normal stay suggestion performance. As a result of the switching, it becomes clear after the fact that the player was staying in the second time saving state related to the losing symbol B2.

In addition, even if the special pattern variable display is executed the prescribed number of times (50 times) without hitting the jackpot after transitioning to the second time-saving state related to the losing pattern B1, the second time-saving state will continue as it is, and will simply The presentation suggesting a short stay for a short period of time ends. By the end of this losing time-saving stay suggestion performance, it becomes clear after the fact that the player has stayed in the second time-saving state related to the losing symbol B1.

In addition, in the third embodiment, when the stop display of the losing symbol C is performed in the normal gaming state, the game shifts to the second time saving state where the prescribed number of time saving times is 1200 times. That is, as in the case of the first embodiment, if the special pattern variable display is executed for the specified number of time saving times (50 times) without hitting the jackpot in the first advantageous time saving state, the specified number of time saving times will actually be 1200 times. The state shifts to the second time saving state. However, in the second time saving state in this case, the loss time saving stay suggesting performance is not executed.

Next, specific examples of the normal stay suggestion performance and the losing time short stay suggestion performance will be explained. FIGS. 69 to 72 are diagrams showing how the normal stay suggestion performance and the losing time short stay suggestion performance are performed on the display section 50a. In the following, for convenience, the display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3, the pending icon, and the display of the icon will be omitted.

The normal stay suggestion effect is executed superimposed on the background image (the first normal background image G111 in FIGS. 69 to 72). For example, the image G40 associated with the normal stay suggestion effect (normal stay suggestion effect image) is formed in a band shape near the upper end of the display section 50a, crossing both ends, and circulates endlessly from right to left. Scroll to display.

The normal stay suggestion effect image G40 includes the words "Entry rate 100%". As mentioned above, if you hit a jackpot in the normal gaming state, the transition rate (entering rate) to the advantageous first time-saving state is 100%, so the phrase "Entry rate 100%" means that you can stay in the normal gaming state. It suggests that there is. Therefore, the normal stay suggesting effect image G40 suggests that the user is staying in the normal gaming state, in other words, that the transition rate (entering rate) to the advantageous first time-saving state in the event of a jackpot is 100%. Contains characters. However, the specific display content of the normal stay suggesting performance image G40 is not particularly limited, and may be changed as appropriate within a range that allows the player to recognize that he/she is staying in the normal gaming state.

In the normal game state and normal performance mode, the normal stay suggestion performance is configured to be permanently executable on the display section 50a, in other words, to be continuously executable across a plurality of variable special symbol displays. As shown in FIG. 69(A), the normal stay suggestion performance image G40 is displayed on the display unit 50a when the variable display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 (special figure variation effect) according to the special figure variation display is executed. is displayed superimposed on the background image (first normal background image G111 in FIG. 69(A)). In addition, as shown in FIG. 69(B), even when the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is executed in response to the stop display of the special figure, the normal stay suggestion effect image G40 continues to display the previous situation without interruption. From then on, the image is continuously displayed on the display unit 50a in a superimposed manner on the background image (the first normal background image G111 in FIG. 69(A)). Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 69(C), when the effect patterns EZ1 to EZ3 that had been stopped in response to the new start of the special symbol variable display start variable display, the normal stay suggestion effect image G40 is continuously displayed on the display unit 50a from the previous situation without interruption, superimposed on the background image (first normal background image G111 in FIG. 69(A)).

Then, in response to the stop display of the loss symbol B1 and the loss symbol B2 in the normal game state and normal performance mode, the normal stay suggestion performance is switched to the loss time short stay suggestion performance (as the normal stay suggestion performance ends) , a performance suggesting a short stay for a short period of time begins). Note that even if the normal stay suggestion performance is switched to the losing time short stay suggestion performance, the normal performance mode continues as the performance mode.

The losing time short stay suggestion effect is executed in a superimposed manner on the background image (in FIGS. 70 to 72, the first normal background image G111). For example, the image G41 associated with the losing time-short stay suggestion effect (losing time-short stay suggestion effect image) is formed in the shape of a band that crosses both ends near the upper end of the display section 50a, and is endless from right to left. Scroll the display in a circular manner. That is, the losing short stay suggestion effect image G41 is configured to have the same shape as the normal stay suggestion effect image G40, and is displayed so as to be switched from the normal stay suggestion effect image G40.

The presentation image G41 that suggests a short stay for a short period of time includes the words ``How many more times until the entry rate is 50%?'' A number is displayed in the “〇〇” part of this character. Specifically, when the loss time short stay suggestion effect image G41 is displayed (when the loss time short stay suggestion effect starts), "50" is displayed as the number, and the special figure stop display (stop of the effect patterns EZ1 to EZ3) is displayed. Each time the command (display) is executed, the number decreases by 1. This is because, as mentioned above, if you hit the jackpot in the second time saving state, the transition rate (entering rate) to the advantageous first time saving state is 50%, and if this second time saving state is related to the losing symbol B2, then , If the special pattern variable display is executed 50 times without hitting the jackpot, the normal game state will be entered (second time short exit), while if it is related to losing pattern B1, the special pattern variable display will be executed 50 times without hitting the jackpot. Even if it is executed twice, it does not go into the normal gaming state (it does not exit the second time shortening), so it says "XX times left until the entry rate is 50%?", and it is currently staying in the second time shortening state, and there are still XX times to go. This suggests that if the special figure variable display is executed, there is a possibility that the second time will be shortened. Therefore, the losing time-saving stay suggestion effect image G41 shows that although the person is currently staying in the second time-saving state, there is a possibility that he will exit the second time-saving state. (Remaining number of times the second time shortening is missed) is indicated. However, the specific display contents of the losing time-saving stay suggestion effect image G41 are not particularly limited, and include that the player is staying in the second time-saving state, that there is a possibility of exiting the second time-saving state, and that the player is staying in the second time-saving state, and The remaining number of time-saving exits may be changed as appropriate within a recognizable range.

Here, switching from the normal stay suggesting performance to the losing time short stay suggesting performance will be explained. The switching is performed in response to the stop display of the losing symbol B1 and the stop display of the losing symbol B2. For example, when the variable display of effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 (special figure variable effect) is executed in response to the special figure 1 variable display related to the losing symbol B1 and the losing symbol B2, as described above, as shown in FIG. 70(A) As shown in , the normal stay suggestion effect image G40 is displayed superimposed on the background image (the first normal background image G111 in FIG. 70(A)). Next, when the stop display of the loss pattern B1 and the stop display of the effect patterns EZ1 to EZ3 are executed in response to the stop display of the loss pattern B2, the normal stay suggestion effect image is displayed as shown in FIG. 70(B). G40 is displayed. At this time, the normal gaming state shifts to the second time saving state. Then, when a new special symbol variable display is started in the second time-saving state, as shown in FIG. A performance suggesting a short stay for a short period of time begins. Note that the losing time-saving stay suggestion effect image G41 illustrated in FIG. 70(C) is the one when the losing time-saving stay suggestion effect is started, so the part representing the remaining number of times of second time-saving stay is "50 times". It has become.

In the second time-saving state and the normal performance mode, the losing time-saving stay suggestion performance is configured to be permanently executable on the display section 50a, in other words, to be continuously executable across a plurality of variable special symbol displays. As shown in FIG. 70(C), the losing time short stay suggestion effect image G41 is displayed on the display section when the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 (special figure variable effect) according to the special figure variable display is being executed. 50a, it is displayed superimposed on the background image (first normal background image G111 in FIG. 70(C)). Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 71(A), even when the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is executed in response to the stop display of the special figure, the loss time short stay suggestion effect image G41 is continuously displayed as before. Depending on the situation, it is continuously displayed on the display unit 50a in a superimposed manner on the background image (the first normal background image G111 in FIG. 71(A)). Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 71(B), even when the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that had been stopped in response to the start of a new variable display of special symbols start variable display, the effect image suggesting a short loss time stay is displayed. G41 is continuously displayed on the display unit 50a in a superimposed manner on the background image (first normal background image G111 in FIG. 71(B)) from the previous situation without interruption. Also, at this time, since the special figure variable display was newly started (the special figure stop display was performed), the part representing the remaining number of second time-saving exits in the losing time-shortening stay suggestion effect image G41 was also reduced by one, and " 49 times.”

After that, if the special pattern variable display continues to be executed without hitting the jackpot in the second time saving state, and the special pattern stop display is performed with the number of times remaining for the second time saving being 1, as shown in FIG. 71(C). In this case, the portion representing the remaining number of second time-saving exits in the losing time-saving stay suggestion effect image G41 is "1 time". Then, it is assumed that the special symbol variable display related to the losing symbol A is started. In this case, first, as shown in FIG. 71(D), the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is started, and one more part representing the remaining number of second time-saving exits in the loss time-saving stay suggestion effect image G41 is displayed. It decreases to "0 times". This "0 times" means that if the second time-saving state in which you are currently staying is related to losing symbol B2, the special symbol variable display is the last special symbol variable display in the second time-saving state; In other words, when the losing symbol A is derived in the special symbol variable display, it is suggested that the second time saving is eliminated and a transition is made to the normal gaming state.

Here, when the losing symbol A is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 72(A), the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 in a manner indicating losing are stopped and displayed. Then, when a new special symbol variable display is executed, the variable display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is started while the normal production mode continues. Here, if the second time saving state is related to the losing symbol B1, the second time saving state continues as it is, and as shown in FIG. 72 (B-1), the losing time saving stay suggestion effect image G41 disappears, and the presentation suggesting a short stay ends without a hitch. On the other hand, if the second time saving state is related to the losing symbol B2, the second time saving state shifts to the normal gaming state (second time saving exit), and as shown in FIG. 72 (B-2). Then, the losing time-short stay suggestion performance image G41 is switched to the normal stay suggestion performance image G40, and the losing time-short stay suggestion performance is ended, and the normal stay suggestion performance is started. In this way, as the losing time-saving stay suggestion performance ends and the normal stay suggestion production starts, it is understood that a new normal gaming state has been entered, and that the second time-saving state in which the player has been staying is related to the losing symbol B2. (the second time saving state where the specified number of time saving times is 50 times), and the losing time shortening stay suggestion performance ends, but the second time saving state continues because the normal stay suggestion performance does not start. , and suggests that the second time saving state in which the player was staying was related to the losing symbol B1 (the second time saving state in which the prescribed number of time saving times was 1200).

As described above, according to the pachinko game machine PY3, the ease of winning into the second starting opening 12 is similar, and the advantageous first The transition rate (entry rate) to the time saving state is different, from a gaming state (second time saving state) where the transition rate (entry rate) is relatively low to a gaming state (normal) where the transition rate (entry rate) is relatively high. Based on the gameplay that there is an opportunity to transition to a gaming state), when you are staying in a gaming state (second time saving state) where the transition rate (entry rate) is relatively low, it is suggested that this is the case (loss By executing the short-time staying suggestion performance), it is possible to prevent players from becoming excessively anxious and losing interest in the game. In addition, when players are staying in a gaming state (normal gaming state) where the transition rate (entering rate) is relatively high, this is suggested (a normal stay suggestion effect is executed), giving the player a sense of security. It is possible to improve the game's interest while providing

Furthermore, in the pachinko gaming machine PY3, there are two types of stay periods in the gaming state (second time saving state) where the transition rate (entry rate) is relatively low, and in both cases, the transition rate (entry rate) is the same. ) suggests that the player is staying in a relatively low gaming state (second time-saving state) (executes a losing time-shortening stay suggestion effect), so it is possible to give the player a sense of excitement and improve his/her interest in the game. . In addition, while the suggestion is being made (while executing the losing time short stay suggestion effect), if the staying period of the gaming state is short, the remaining period until the gaming state ends is suggested (while the losing time short stay suggestion effect is being executed). Since the time-saving stay suggestion effect image G41 indicates the remaining number of second time-saving exits), it is possible to further enhance the player's sense of excitement and improve his/her interest in the game.

In addition, if the stay period of the game state is short, the remaining period until the game state ends is suggested (the remaining number of times the second time saver exit is suggested by the losing time short stay suggestion effect image G41), the stay period is When the stay period is actually ended and the transition rate (entry rate) is transferred to a gaming state (normal gaming state) where the transition rate is relatively high when the termination is announced, the transition rate (entry rate) Since it is suggested that the player is staying in a relatively high gaming state (normal gaming state) (a normal stay suggestion effect is executed), it is possible to give the player joy and a sense of security and improve his/her interest in playing the game. . On the other hand, if the stay period of the gaming state is short, the remaining period until the end of the gaming state is suggested (the remaining number of second time saving exits is suggested by the loss time saving stay suggestion effect image G41), the staying period is When it is announced that the period of stay has not ended and the gaming state (second time saving state) where the transition rate (entry rate) is relatively low continues, the transition will be terminated. Since it is suggested that the player is staying in a gaming state (second time saving state) where the rate (entering rate) is relatively low (the stay suggestion effect is not normally executed), it may cause the player to feel uneasy. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

(Example of modification of third embodiment)
Next, a modification example of the pachinko gaming machine PY3 according to the third embodiment will be described. Note that it is also possible to appropriately combine the modification examples described below.

In the third embodiment, two types of prescribed number of times of time saving related to the second time saving state are set, 50 times and 1200 times, but the specific value of the prescribed number of time saving times may be changed as appropriate. Further, the number of specified times of time saving in the second time saving state may be set to three or more types. In this case, three or more losing symbol types that cause the second time saving state may be set, and the losing symbol types may be associated with the specified number of time saving times. In addition, in this case, when the normal gaming state is transferred to the second time saving state, the portion representing the remaining number of second time saving exits included in the losing time saving stay suggestion effect image G41 is the one with the largest number of specified time saving times and the one with the smallest number of times. It may be possible to display various items from a plurality of items, such as the item that is neither the most nor the least. In this case, while staying in the second time saving state, the portion representing the remaining number of times of leaving the second time saving, included in the losing time saving stay suggestion effect image G41, may be decreased or increased.

Furthermore, in the third embodiment, the normal stay suggestion production and the losing time short stay suggestion production are continuously executed permanently, but both or one of them is different from each special symbol variation production or a specific It may be executed in a specific period, such as a period from the start of the special figure variation performance until a predetermined time elapses, or once in a plurality of special figure variation performances.

Further, in the third embodiment, the display position and shape of the normal stay suggestion effect image G40 and the lost time short stay suggestion effect image G41 are the same, but both or one of these display positions and shapes are made to be different. It's okay. Further, although the normal stay suggestion effect image G40 and the lost time short stay suggestion effect image G41 are formed in a band shape, either or both of them may be formed in a shape other than the band shape. In addition, the normal stay suggesting effect image G40 suggests staying in the normal gaming state by the words "Entry rate 100%", and the loss time short stay suggestion effect image G41 indicates the second stay by the words "Enter rate 50%". Although it is suggested that the player is staying in the time-saving state, it may be suggested that the player is staying in each game state using other characters or other forms of expression.

Further, in the third embodiment, in the losing time-saving stay suggestion effect image G41, the remaining number of times the second time-saving exit is suggested by a countdown, but the suggestion method is not limited to the countdown, but may be suggested by another method such as a count-up. It's okay. Furthermore, in the third embodiment, the three items of staying in the second time saving state, the possibility of leaving the second time saving state, and the number of remaining times of leaving the second time saving state are combined into one loss time saving suggestion production image. Although suggested in G41, a different image may be used to suggest each item to be suggested.

Further, in the third embodiment, the losing time short stay suggestion performance and the normal stay suggestion performance are executed on the display section 50a (image display device 50), but both or one of these is executed on the display section 50a (image display device 50). ) may be executed using a presentation device other than the above. In this case, if it is a losing time-saving stay suggestion effect, a presentation device other than the display section 50a (image display device 50) indicates that the player is staying in the second time-saving state and that there is a possibility of exiting the second time-saving state. It is sufficient if you can recognize that there is, and the number of times remaining for the second time saving. Further, in the case of a normal stay suggesting effect, it is sufficient if the player can recognize that he/she is staying in the normal gaming state using a effect device other than the display section 50a (image display device 50).

In addition, the rate of transition to the first advantageous time-saving state (entry rate) in the case of a jackpot in the normal gaming state, and the rate of transition to the first advantageous time-saving state (entry rate) in the case of a jackpot in the second time-saving state, are also determined. While maintaining the relationship that the former is higher than the latter, the present invention is not limited to the third embodiment, and may be modified as appropriate.

Furthermore, in the third embodiment, when staying in the second time-saving state related to the losing symbol B1, after the losing time-saving stay suggestion performance is finished, the normal stay suggestion performance image G40 and the losing time-shortening stay suggestion performance image G41 are displayed. Although an image suggesting that the player is staying in that gaming state is not displayed, such an image is displayed to suggest that the player is staying in the second time saving state related to the losing symbol B1. It's okay. Further, in this case, on the contrary, when the player stays in the second time saving state related to the losing symbol B2 but exits the second time saving state and shifts to the normal gaming state, the normal stay suggesting performance may not be executed. Furthermore, in the third embodiment, the same normal stay suggestion effect image G40 is used for the normal stay suggestion effect before transitioning to the second time reduction state and the normal stay suggestion effect after exiting the second time reduction state. , different images may be used.

In addition, in the third embodiment, there is one type of losing symbol related to the special figure 2 (losing symbol C), and when the losing symbol C related to the special symbol 2 is stopped and displayed in the normal game state, the prescribed number of times for saving time is 1200. However, the specified number of times of time saving is not particularly limited, and may be changed as appropriate. For example, the prescribed number of times for saving time related to the losing symbol C may be set to 50 times, which is the same as the losing symbol B2. Alternatively, two or more types of losing symbols related to the special figure 2 are set, and two or more prescribed times are set according to the losing symbol types, and even in the second time-saving state, the special figure can be played without hitting the jackpot. If the variable display continues to be executed, there is a possibility that the number of executions of the special figure variable display will reach the specified number of time reductions and the game will return to the normal gaming state, and even in the second time reduction state after the first time reduction exit, the losing time reduction stay suggestion effect may occur. may be executed.

(Example of modification of the first embodiment to the third embodiment)
Next, modification examples of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the first embodiment to the pachinko gaming machine PY3 according to the third embodiment will be described.

In the first to third embodiments, the ending condition (continuable period) related to the first time saving state is specified by the number of executions of the special map 2 variable display, and the ending condition (continuable period) related to the second time saving state ) is specified by the number of executions of the special figure variable display, but the subject (object) related to the end condition (continuable period) of both or one of the first time saving state and the second time saving state is the special figure 2 variable display. It is not limited to the number of times the display or special figure variable display is executed, and may be changed as appropriate. For example, instead of the special figure 2 variable display or the special figure variable display, you can display the time, the number of appearances of a specific effect such as reach, SP reach, or a specific preview effect, the number of game balls fired, the number of prize balls won, and the number of prize balls won. The number of executions of the diagram variable display may be changed as appropriate.

7. Inventions Disclosed in the Above-mentioned Embodiments The following inventions A to E are disclosed up to the previous paragraph of this [Detailed Description of the Invention]. In the descriptions of Inventions A to E, the names and expressions of corresponding components in the embodiments of the inventions described above, and the symbols used in the drawings are added in parentheses for reference. However, elements such as means constituting each invention are not limited to this appendix. Invention A is a generic term for inventions A1 to A5 below, invention B is a generic term for inventions B1 to B4 below, invention C is a generic term for inventions C1 to C3 below, and invention D is a generic term for inventions A1 to A5 below. is a generic term for the following inventions D1 to D4, and invention E is a generic term for the following inventions E1 to E4.

7-1-1. Invention A1
The gaming machine according to invention A1 is
In the normal gaming state, predetermined determinations (jackpot determination, jackpot symbol type determination, loss symbol type determination) can be executed, and by deriving the first specific result (jackpot) in the predetermined determination, a specific game (jackpot In a gaming machine equipped with a game control means (game control microcomputer 101) that executes a game (game) and thereafter puts the player into an advantageous game state (advantageous first time-saving state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state,
In the normal gaming state, when a second specific result (loss symbol B) different from the first specific result is derived in the predetermined determination, the gaming control means changes the normal gaming state or the advantageous gaming state. Shift to a different specific gaming state (second time saving state),
The probability (50%) that the first specific result is derived in the predetermined judgment in the specific gaming state and the transition to the advantageous gaming state is greater than the probability (50%) that the first specific result is derived in the predetermined judgment in the normal gaming state. A gaming machine characterized in that the probability (100%) of being derived and shifting to the advantageous gaming state is higher.

7-1-2. Invention A2
The gaming machine according to invention A2 is
A gaming machine according to invention A1,
Furthermore, it is equipped with an operation means (RAM chest switch),
The game machine is characterized in that the game control means causes a transition to the normal game state when the operation means is operated while staying in a game state different from the normal game state.

7-1-3. Invention A3
The gaming machine according to invention A3 is
A gaming machine according to invention A1 or invention A2,
The game control means executes the specific game in the specific gaming state by deriving the first specific result in the predetermined determination, and thereafter executes the specific game in a manner that is more advantageous to the player than in the normal gaming state. A gaming machine characterized in that a special gaming state (a first disadvantageous time-saving state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous gaming state may be set.

7-1-4. Invention A4
The gaming machine according to invention A4 is
A gaming machine according to invention A3,
The game control means ends the special game state when a termination condition related to the special game state (that the special figure 2 variable display is executed 10 times) is satisfied, and then shifts to the specific game state. A gaming machine characterized by:

7-1-5. Invention A5
The gaming machine according to invention A5 is
By deriving a first specific result (jackpot) in a predetermined determination, an advantageous gaming state (advantageous first time-saving state) that is more advantageous to the player than a normal gaming state is set as a gaming state in which the predetermined determination can be executed. In a game machine equipped with a game control hand (game control microcomputer 101) stage that may cause the game to shift to
Furthermore, it is equipped with an operation means (RAM clear switch),
The game control means is capable of shifting to the advantageous game state with a first probability (100%) when the operation means is operated and the first specific result is derived in the predetermined determination. When the first gaming state (normal gaming state) is set, and in the first gaming state, a second specific result (losing symbol B) different from the first specific result is derived in the predetermined determination, the predetermined A second gaming state (second time saving state) in which the advantageous gaming state can be transitioned to with a second probability (50%) lower than the first probability when the first specific result is derived in the determination. A gaming machine characterized by:

7-2-1. Invention B1
The gaming machine according to invention B1 is
A predetermined determination (jackpot determination) can be executed in the normal gaming state, and by deriving a first specific result (jackpot) in the predetermined determination, a specific game (jackpot game) is executed, and then the In a game machine equipped with a game control means (game control microcomputer 101) that can set an advantageous game state (first time saving state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state,
In the normal gaming state, when a second specific result (loss symbol B) different from the first specific result is derived in the predetermined determination, the gaming control means changes the normal gaming state or the advantageous gaming state. Shift to a different specific gaming state (second time saving state),
The probability (50%) that the first specific result is derived in the predetermined judgment in the specific gaming state and the transition to the advantageous gaming state is greater than the probability (50%) that the first specific result is derived in the predetermined judgment in the normal gaming state. A gaming machine characterized in that the probability (100%) of being derived and shifting to the advantageous gaming state is higher.

7-2-2. Invention B2
The gaming machine according to invention B2 is
A gaming machine according to invention B1,
Furthermore, it is equipped with an operation means (RAM chest switch),
The game machine is characterized in that the game control means causes a transition to the normal game state when the operation means is operated while staying in a game state different from the normal game state.

7-2-3. Invention B3
The gaming machine according to invention B3 is
A gaming machine according to invention B1 or invention B2,
The game control means executes the specific game by deriving the first specific result in the predetermined determination in the specific gaming state, and thereafter enters the normal gaming state. A gaming machine with special features.

7-2-4. Invention B4
The gaming machine according to invention B4 is
By deriving the first specific result (jackpot) in a predetermined determination, a specific game (jackpot game) is executed, and then an advantageous gaming state (advantageous first time-saving state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. In a gaming machine equipped with a game control means (game control microcomputer 101) that sometimes causes the game to shift to the advantageous gaming state and sometimes does not cause the game to shift to the advantageous gaming state,
Furthermore, it is equipped with an operation means (RAM clear switch),
The game control means determines a first probability when the operation means is operated, when the transition to the advantageous game state is not made after the specific game, and when the first specific result is derived in the predetermined determination. (100%) to a first gaming state (normal gaming state) in which it is possible to shift to the advantageous gaming state, and in the first gaming state, in the predetermined determination, a second specified result different from the first specified result is set. When the result (losing symbol B) is derived, if the first specific result is derived by the predetermined determination, the game shifts to the advantageous gaming state with a second probability (50%) lower than the first probability. A game machine characterized in that the game machine is set to a second game state (second time saving state) in which the player can play the game.

7-3-1. Invention C1
The gaming machine according to invention C1 is
Predetermined determinations (jackpot determination, jackpot symbol determination, loss symbol type determination) can be executed in a first gaming state (normal gaming state) and a second gaming state (second time saving state) different from the first gaming state. and a game control means (game control microcomputer 101) that may execute a specific game (jackpot game) when a specific result (jackpot) is derived in the predetermined determination;
A gaming machine equipped with a performance control means (performance control microcomputer 121) capable of executing a performance,
After the specific game, the game control means may or may not enter a specific gaming state (advantageous first time-saving state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state and the second gaming state. ,
The probability (100%) of being in the specific gaming state when the specific result is derived in the first gaming state, and the probability (100%) of being in the specific gaming state when the specific result is derived in the second gaming state. (50%),
The performance control means indicates that the specific result has been derived in both cases where the specific result is derived in the first gaming state and when the specific result is derived in the second gaming state. It is possible to perform a first suggestion performance (a jackpot suggestion performance and a temporary stop display in a manner that suggests the disadvantageous first time saving state of performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 immediately after that), and after the suggestion performance, the specific A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to execute a second suggestion performance (inciting performance) that suggests whether the result was derived in the first gaming state or the second gaming state.

7-3-2. Invention C2
The gaming machine according to invention C2 is
A gaming machine according to invention C1,
The probability of being in the specific gaming state when the specific result is derived in the first gaming state is higher than the probability of being in the specific gaming state when the specific result is derived in the second gaming state. high,
When the performance control means indicates in the second suggestion performance that the derivation of the specific result was performed in the second gaming state, the performance control means subsequently provides a second suggesting performance that indicates whether or not to shift to the specific gaming state. 3. A gaming machine characterized by executing a 3-suggestion performance (revenge performance).

7-3-3. Invention C3
The gaming machine according to invention C3 is
A gaming machine according to invention C1 or invention C2,
When the specific result is derived in the first game state and the specific game state is entered after the specific game, the performance control means is configured to cause the specific result to be derived in the second suggestive performance. If it is suggested that the game was played in the first gaming state, then the notification performance (advantageous first of performance patterns EZ1 to EZ3) that notifies the transition to the specific gaming state without executing the third suggestion performance is executed. 1. A gaming machine characterized in that a temporary stop display is performed in a manner suggesting a time saving state.

7-4-1. Invention D1
The gaming machine according to invention D1 is
By deriving the first specific result (jackpot) in a predetermined determination (jackpot determination, jackpot symbol determination, losing symbol determination), it is possible to shift to an advantageous gaming state (advantageous first time saving state) that is advantageous to the player. a game control means (game control microcomputer 101) capable of executing the predetermined determination in the advantageous game state;
In a gaming machine equipped with a performance control means (performance control microcomputer 121) capable of executing a performance,
The game control means is configured to set a first game state (normal game state) that allows transition to the advantageous game state with a first probability (100%) when the first specific result is derived in the predetermined determination. ), when a second specific result (loss pattern B) different from the first specific result is derived in the predetermined determination, when the first specific result is derived in the predetermined determination, the first a second gaming state (second time saving state) that allows transition to the advantageous gaming state with a second probability (50%) lower than the probability of;
The performance control means, in the first gaming state, when a predetermined condition (a predetermined operation of the first performance button 40k during a period from when the fluctuating display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 starts until 3 seconds elapse) is satisfied. , a negative reduction effect indicating that the probability of transitioning to the advantageous gaming state has not decreased from the first probability to the second probability when the first specific result is derived in the predetermined determination; A gaming machine is characterized in that it executes a losing time-saving negative effect).

7-4-2. Invention D2
The gaming machine according to invention D2 is
By deriving the first specific result (jackpot) in a predetermined determination (jackpot determination, jackpot symbol determination, losing symbol determination), it is possible to shift to an advantageous gaming state (advantageous first time saving state) that is advantageous to the player. a game control means (game control microcomputer 101) capable of executing the predetermined determination in the advantageous game state;
In a gaming machine equipped with a performance control means (performance control microcomputer 121) capable of executing a performance,
The game control means is configured to set a first game state (normal game state) that allows transition to the advantageous game state with a first probability (100%) when the first specific result is derived in the predetermined determination. ), when a second specific result (loss pattern B) different from the first specific result is derived in the predetermined determination, when the first specific result is derived in the predetermined determination, the first a second gaming state (second time saving state) that allows transition to the advantageous gaming state with a second probability (50%) lower than the probability of;
The production control means, in the second gaming state, when a predetermined condition (a predetermined operation of the first production button 40k during a period from when the fluctuating display of production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 starts until 3 seconds elapse) is satisfied. , a decrease affirmative effect indicating that the probability of transitioning to the advantageous gaming state has decreased from the first probability to the second probability when the first specific result is derived in the predetermined determination. A gaming machine characterized by:

7-4-3. Invention D3
The gaming machine according to invention D3 is
By deriving the first specific result (jackpot) in a predetermined determination (jackpot determination, jackpot symbol determination, losing symbol determination), it is possible to shift to an advantageous gaming state (advantageous first time saving state) that is advantageous to the player. a game control means (game control microcomputer 101) capable of executing the predetermined determination in the advantageous game state;
In a gaming machine equipped with a performance control means (performance control microcomputer 121) capable of executing a performance,
The game control means is configured to set a first game state (normal game state) that allows transition to the advantageous game state with a first probability (100%) when the first specific result is derived in the predetermined determination. ), when a second specific result (loss pattern B) different from the first specific result is derived in the predetermined determination, when the first specific result is derived in the predetermined determination, the first a second gaming state (second time saving state) that allows transition to the advantageous gaming state with a second probability (50%) lower than the probability of;
In the first game state and the second game state, the performance control means operates the first performance button 40k under a predetermined condition (a period from when the fluctuating display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 starts until 3 seconds elapse). (predetermined operation) is established, it is possible that the probability of transitioning to the advantageous gaming state has not decreased from the first probability to the second probability when the first specific result is derived in the predetermined determination. A game machine characterized by executing a reduction suggestion performance that suggests that there is a sex.

7-4-4. Invention D4
The gaming machine according to invention D4 is
A gaming machine according to any one of inventions D1 to D3,
It further includes an operation means (first production button 40k),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the predetermined condition is that the operating means is subjected to a predetermined operation (long press) after at least the predetermined determination is made.

7-5-1. Invention E1
The gaming machine according to invention E1 is
Predetermined determinations (jackpot determination, jackpot symbol determination, losing symbol determination) can be executed in the normal gaming state, and a specific game (jackpot game) is executed when a specific result (jackpot) is derived from the predetermined determination. and a game control means (game control microcomputer 101) that may or may not enter an advantageous game state (advantageous first time saving state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state;
In a gaming machine equipped with a performance control means (performance control microcomputer 121) capable of executing a performance,
The game control means may set a specific gaming state (second time-saving state) in which the probability of reaching the advantageous gaming state is lower than the normal gaming state when the specific result is derived in the predetermined determination;
The normal gaming state may be set in response to the end of the continuable period (period in which the special figure variable display is executed 50 times or 1200 times) related to the specific gaming state,
The continuation period includes a first continuation period (50 times) and a second continuation period (1200 times) that is longer than the first continuation period,
In the specific gaming state related to the first continuable period and the specific gaming state related to the second continuable period, the performance control means generates a specific stay suggestion indicating that the user is staying in the specific gaming state. A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to execute a performance (a performance suggesting a short stay in a losing time).

7-5-2. Invention E2
The gaming machine according to invention E2 is
A gaming machine according to invention E1,
The specific stay suggestion performance is characterized in that, in addition to staying in the specific gaming state, it also suggests the remaining period until the normal gaming state is reached based on the first continuable period. A gaming machine.

7-5-3. Invention E3
The gaming machine according to invention E3 is
A gaming machine according to invention E1 or invention E2,
In the normal gaming state, when a special result (losing symbol B) different from the specific result is derived in the predetermined determination, the gaming control means shifts to the specific gaming state,
The special results include a first special result (losing symbol B1) and a second special result (losing symbol B2),
If the first special result is derived in the predetermined determination, the specific gaming state related to the first continuation possible period is entered, and if the second special result is derived in the predetermined determination, the second special result is determined. A gaming machine characterized by being in the specific gaming state related to a continuable period.

7-5-4. Invention E4
The gaming machine according to invention E4 is
A gaming machine according to any one of inventions E1 to E3,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the performance control means is capable of executing, in the normal gaming state, a normal stay suggesting performance that suggests staying in the normal gaming state.

7-5-5. Invention E5
The gaming machine according to invention E5 is
A gaming machine according to any one of inventions E1 to E4,
Furthermore, it is equipped with an operation means (RAM chest switch),
The game machine is characterized in that the game control means causes a transition to the normal game state when the operation means is operated while staying in a game state different from the normal game state.

PY, PY1, PY2, PY3...Pachinko gaming machine 1...Game board 6...Game area 6A...Left gaming area 6B...Right gaming area 11...First starting port 11a...First starting port sensor 12...Second starting port 12a... Second starting opening sensor 12k...Electric chew opening/closing member 13...Gate 14...First big winning opening 14a...First winning opening sensor 14k...First AT opening/closing member 15...Second winning opening 15a...Second big winning opening sensor 15k...Second AT opening/closing member 16...Specific area 16a...Specific area sensor 16k...Distribution member 50...Image display device 50a...Display unit 52...Speaker 53...Frame lamp 100...Game control board 101...Game control microcomputer 120...Direction Control board 121... Microcomputer for performance control 140... Image control board

Claims (3)

A game in which a predetermined determination can be executed in a first gaming state and a second gaming state different from the first gaming state, and when a specific result is derived in the predetermined determination, a specific game may be executed. control means;
A gaming machine equipped with a performance control means capable of executing a performance,
After the specific game, the game control means may or may not enter a specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state and the second gaming state,
The probability of being in the specific gaming state when the specific result is derived in the first gaming state is different from the probability of being in the specific gaming state when the specific result is derived in the second gaming state,
The performance control means indicates that the specific result has been derived in both cases where the specific result is derived in the first gaming state and when the specific result is derived in the second gaming state. It is possible to execute a first suggestion performance that indicates, and after the suggestion performance, it is possible to execute a second suggestion performance that suggests whether the derivation of the specific result was performed in the first gaming state or the second gaming state. A gaming machine characterized by: The gaming machine according to claim 1,
The probability of being in the specific gaming state when the specific result is derived in the first gaming state is higher than the probability of being in the specific gaming state when the specific result is derived in the second gaming state. high,
When the performance control means indicates in the second suggestion performance that the derivation of the specific result was performed in the second gaming state, the performance control means subsequently provides a second suggesting performance that indicates whether or not to shift to the specific gaming state. 3. A gaming machine characterized by executing a three-suggestion effect. The gaming machine according to claim 2,
When the specific result is derived in the first game state and the specific game state is entered after the specific game, the performance control means is configured to cause the specific result to be derived in the second suggestive performance. A game characterized in that, when it is suggested that the game was being played in the first gaming state, a notification effect is subsequently executed to notify that the game will proceed to the specific game state without executing the third suggestion effect. Machine.

Images